Grand Cherokee

Grand Cherokee
Grand Cherokee
O P E R AT I N G I N F O R M AT I O N
Table of Contents
......................................................................3
1
INTRODUCTION
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
..........................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
SAFETY
6
STARTING AND OPERATING
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
10
MULTIMEDIA
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
12
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
1
2
1
INTRODUCTION
•
•
•
•
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPORTANT NOTICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . .
• Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.4
.4
.5
.5
.5
.5
.6
.6
3
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high
quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go
places and perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger
cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to
become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended
for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, and
transmission and transfer case shifting. Learn
how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with
experience, but as in driving any vehicle, take it
easy as you begin. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload it or expect it
to overcome the forces of nature. Always observe local laws wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. Be sure to read the
“Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
4
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or a collision.
Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or
while intoxicated may result in loss of control,
collision with other vehicles or objects, going off
the road, or overturning; any of which may lead
to serious injury or death. Also, failure to use
seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to
a greater risk of injury or death.
To keep your vehicle running at its best, have
your vehicle serviced at recommended intervals
by an authorized dealer or distributor who has
the qualified personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all service.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has
a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of
off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner,
all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles
may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or
other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of
vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle
safely may result in a collision, rollover of the
vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally
interested in your complete satisfaction with this
vehicle. If you encounter a service or warranty
problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction, discuss the matter with your authorized
dealer or distributor’s management.
Your authorized dealer or distributor will be
happy to assist you with any questions about
your vehicle.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal
injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVED
TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in
this Owner’s Manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference
and remain with the vehicle when sold.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or to
make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes
the features that are standard or available as
extra cost options. Therefore, some of the
equipment and accessories in this publication
may not appear on your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual first
before driving your vehicle and before attaching or installing parts/accessories or
making other modifications to the vehicle.
In view of the many replacement parts and
accessories from various manufacturers available on the market, the manufacturer cannot be
certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will
not be impaired by the attachment or installation
of such parts. Even if such parts are officiallyapproved (for example, by a general operating
permit for the part or by constructing the part in
an officially approved design), or if an individual
operating permit was issued for the vehicle after
the attachment or installation of such parts, it
cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving
safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore,
neither experts nor official agencies are liable.
The manufacturer only assumes responsibility
when parts, which are expressly authorized or
recommended by the manufacturer, are attached or installed at an authorized dealer. The
same applies when modifications to the original
condition are subsequently made on the manufacturer’s vehicles.
Your warranties do not cover any part that the
manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover
the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might
be caused or needed because of the installation
or use of non-manufacturer parts, components,
equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your
warranties cover the costs of repairing damage
or conditions caused by any changes to your
vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications.
Original MOPAR® parts and accessories and
other products approved by the manufacturer,
including qualified advice, are available at your
authorized dealer.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s
Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of
the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or
throughout this Owner’s Manual:
5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result in
a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
6
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/
ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
•
•
•
•
FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
7
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield
3 — Headlights
8
4 — Wheels/Tires
5 — Exterior Mirrors
6 — Doors
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Steering Wheel
10
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Paddle Shifter
6 — Glove Compartment
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Seats
3 — Transmission Gear Selector
4 — Climate Controls
5 — Switch Panel
6 — Uconnect Radio
11
12
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .
• IGNITION SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
• How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
• To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . .
• Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .
• Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tamper Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.18
.18
.20
.20
.20
.21
.22
.22
.22
.23
.23
.23
.23
.23
.24
.24
.24
.24
.24
.25
.25
.25
13
• DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . .
• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .
• Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front Seats. . . . . . .
• Head Restraints — Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If Equipped . . . .
• Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .
• Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
—
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.25
.25
.26
.26
.28
.28
.29
.29
.31
.32
.33
.35
.36
.36
.37
.38
.38
.38
.39
.39
.40
.40
.40
.40
.41
.41
.41
. . .41
• Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . . .
• Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped . . . . .
• EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights Only . . .
• Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front And Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .
• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Courtesy Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.41
.42
.42
.43
.43
.43
.43
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.43
.43
.44
.44
.44
.44
.44
.45
.45
.45
.45
.45
.45
.45
.46
.46
.47
.47
.48
.48
.48
.48
.49
15
• HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .
• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection . . . . .
• Reset Auto-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.49
.50
.50
.56
.57
.59
.59
.59
.59
.59
.60
.60
.60
.60
.61
.61
.61
.61
.61
.61
.61
.61
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.62
.62
.63
.63
.63
.63
.63
.64
.64
.64
• HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Open The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
• Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.64
.64
.64
.65
.65
.65
.66
.67
.69
.69
.71
.71
.71
.73
.73
17
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE:
The passive entry key fob if left inside the
car may not be found by the passive entry
control module if it is located next to a cell
phone, laptop, or other electronic devices,
since they could block the frequency signal.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
Key Fob
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob.
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is
disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate.
Key Fob With Emergency Key
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door
panel.
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
18
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the
first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Multimedia” for
further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry”
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling
may apply.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the
key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a
#2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart.
Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Key Fob Battery
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a
table or similar, and then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Remove The Emergency Key
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
19
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
20
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive
electronic steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with the ignition OFF.
The steering wheel lock releases with the ignition ON. If the lock does not disengage and the
vehicle does not start, turn the wheel to the left
and right to disengage the lock.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three
operating positions which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions
are OFF, ACC, and RUN.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push
to operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some Electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to ⴖStarting Procedures,ⴖ in ⴖStarting
And Operating.ⴖ for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the
message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On”
in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof (if equipped) will remain active up to ten
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature
is programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, place the engine in the
OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
21
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to
start the engine conveniently from
outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the
Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in
temperatures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the
optional heated seats, and optional heated
steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F
(4.4° C). Refer to “Front Heated Seats” and
“Front Ventilated Seats” in “Seats” in this section
for further information.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an
automatic transmission to be equipped
with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause you or others to
be severely injured or killed when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (time out) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with a
push of the ignition START/STOP button after
two consecutive time outs.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
22
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death
when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut
down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the
key fob. However, the ignition must be
placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the
Remote Start button for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And
Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the ignition START
button.
Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, Auto-Comfort
will work anytime the temperature conditions are
correct. When the feature is enabled, regardless
of Remote Start or regular keyless start, the
driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically turn
on when the Remote Start is activated. These
features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Auto Comfort System can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect system. For more information on Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key fob
is used to start and operate the vehicle. The
23
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if
an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on
for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb
check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key fob to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is
a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have
the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
24
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the
vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to
an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless EnterN-Go — Ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after approximately 90 seconds,
and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm
itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the “OFF” mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer to
"Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle"
for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the
liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm
or disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the ve-
hicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and
the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock
plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
when you disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
25
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go — Ignition, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
26
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/
OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it
has been raining/snowing on the Passive
Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the car when door lock
button on trim is used to lock the door. At the
third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key
is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s
door is open, the doors will not lock.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will
arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door
automatically.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the
door. The door may be unlocked manually by
raising the lock knob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
and fuel door without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. There are five situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive
Entry Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which will
function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
• When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm
or armed status and the liftgate transitions
from open to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from opened to
closed and remote start is active.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then
close the doors.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob
outside the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
door handles, pushing the passive entry lock
button will lock the vehicle.
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could unlock
the door(s).
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when
a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
27
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will
lock all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate
unlock feature is built into the electronic
liftgate release.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
is enabled.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
2. All doors are closed.
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can
lock or unlock the doors, using either
Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle reacting and unlocking.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using
Uconnect System, the key protection described in ⴖPreventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicleⴖ
remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate
if the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
28
4. Any door is opened.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive
Entry Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate door
handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock System
— Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
SEATS
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged,
the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection
Door Lock system, always test the door
from the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from
the inside to make certain it is in the
desired position.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of
the seat could cause you to lose control.
The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the
seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously
or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on the door lock knob
(unlocked position), roll down the window,
and open the door with the outside door
handle.
29
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the seatback
forward. To return to the seating position, raise
the seatback and lock it into place.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
30
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of
the seat could cause you to lose control.
The seat belt might not be properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured
or killed. Only adjust a seat while the
vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could
slide under the seat belt and be severely
injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to
allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with
the left outboard or rear center seat belt
buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with
the right outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seatback to fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be
seated and using the proper restraint system.
Rear Seat Folded
31
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and
release the lever at the desired position. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
board side of the seat. There are two switches
that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switches
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt, which could result in
serious injury or death.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the out32
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
a memory switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the driver seat, side
mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN
position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either
of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be
in PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob,
refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory”
in this section.
Power Lumbar Switch
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
Memory Seat Switch
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
33
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⴖProgramming The Memory Featureⴖ
in this section for instructions on how to set
a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1) or (2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
34
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted
when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the memory switch, push memory button number (1) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position (1).
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two
using the memory switch, push memory button number (2) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position (2).
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat and
steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the
driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled
(or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
• Press the heated seat button
the HI setting ON.
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
time to turn the LO setting ON.
once to turn
a second
a third time
• Press the heated seat button
to turn the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after approximately 45
minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will
be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
35
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HIlevel heating. Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating.
Push the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
number of indicator lights changes from two to
36
one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
time to choose LO.
once to
a second
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third
time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations
in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI
and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear-impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to reduce the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for
further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Supplemental Active Head
Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
Adjustment Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
37
• In the event of deployment of an Active
Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant
Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further
information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position but do not return to their normal position
when the rear seat is raised. After returning
either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard
head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise
it, or push downward on the head restraint to
lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether,
refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”
for further information.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Rear Head Restraint
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
38
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
WARNING! (Continued)
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the lever toward you or
push the lever away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to pre-programmed positions. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has
been turned on, it will operate for an average of
80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary depending on the
temperature of the environment. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
a
• Press the heated steering wheel button
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
(Continued)
39
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If
Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
40
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light in the
button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve rear view viewing.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto
a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors
— If Equipped
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions:
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
• Full rearward position
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Normal position
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
• Full forward position
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side door trim panel.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” for further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
(Available With Memory Seat Only)
— If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory seat setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
The Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse feature can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can
be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into
the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
41
mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the home position. If
the mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice
or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause
excessive drag.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is
not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
• The mirrors are
folded/unfolded.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors
are closed, and the doors are locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
42
accidentally
manually
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded
position.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pressing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will
turn on automatically.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended
while the sun visor is against the windshield
for additional sun blockage through the front
of the vehicle.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel
lights, cargo lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass
and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching
the lenses and reducing light output,
avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove
road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise. When
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are
also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic
headlight and fog light (if equipped)
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to
the A (AUTO) position.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of
the headlight beam in reaction to changes in
vehicle pitch.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity
Discharge Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System
is turned on, the headlights will initialize
by performing a brief sequence of rotations.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active
only when the vehicle is moving forward.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
43
switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off)
position.
Headlights On Automatically With
Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable
feature. When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running, they will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is
on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive
Wiper System” and it is activated, the headlights
will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one
minute, and they will turn off approximately four
minutes after the wipers completely stop. Refer
to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
section for further information.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with
a headlight delay that will leave the headlights
on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This
delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF
44
while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay
can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE:
• This feature can be programmed through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if the customer leaves the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position
when the ignition is place to the OFF
position.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a
chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened.
off for the duration of the turn signal
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
• The DRL function may be disabled
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
Front And Rear Fog Lights — If
Equipped
The front and rear fog lights may be operated as
desired when visibility is poor due to fog. The fog
lights will activate in the following order: Push
the headlight switch once and the front fog lights
come on. Push the switch a second time and the
rear fog lights will come on (front fog lights stay
on). Push the switch a third time and the rear fog
lights turn off (front fog stays on). Push the
switch a fourth times and the front fog turns off.
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity)
come on whenever the engine is running, and
the transmission is not in the PARK position.
The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
• If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp
on the same side of the vehicle will turn
Fog Light Switch
NOTE:
The headlight switch must first be turned to
the position lights or headlights position
before the fog lamp switch can be pushed in.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward
the steering wheel will turn the low beams back
on, or shut the high beams off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn
on at high beam and remain on until the lever is
released.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
flash to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it
would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of
view will cause headlights to remain on
longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,
film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
your local authorized dealer.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all
the way up to the dome on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
cycled OFF, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are
turned on and left on for eight minutes while the
ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
45
NOTE:
The battery saver mode is canceled if the
ignition is OFF and the headlamp switch is in
the park lamp position. The parking lamps
will remain on and drain the vehicle’s battery.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry key fob is pushed.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or when the dimmer
control (rotating wheel on the right side of the
headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest upward
position. If your vehicle is equipped with remote
keyless entry and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will
turn on. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the last (off) detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as
the “Party” mode because it allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
46
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control
up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness
of the instrument cluster display, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is
useful when headlights are required during the
day.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth
detent for high wiper operation.
Ambient Light
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side
of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
Washer” in this section.
Dimmer Control
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light casts illumination
for improved visibility of the floor and center
console area.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Multifunction Lever
47
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the
washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will
be sprayed on the windshield. The wash
function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one
second (fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold while spray
is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
48
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
Mist Control
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. The feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position
one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position four is the most sensitive. Setting three
should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place
the wiper switch in the OFF position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water
is present on the windshield.
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle
of the lever.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF
EQUIPPED
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect System,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the
ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position —
When the ignition is ON, and the automatic
transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the
Rain Sensing system will not operate until the
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop
if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump
will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to
the “park” position.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax
or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing
performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not
operate under the following conditions:
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released it will return to the
OFF position and the wipers will cycle several
times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent
for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward
once more will activate the washer
pump which will continue to operate as
long as the switch is held. Upon release of the
switch, the wipers will resume the continuous
rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is
in the OFF position, rotating it downward will
activate the rear washer pump which will con-
The multifunction lever operates the headlight
washers when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the headlights are turned on. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and release it. The headlight washers will
spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer
fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the
windshield washers will spray the windshield
and the windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE:
After turning the ignition switch and headlights ON, the headlight washers will operate
on the first spray of the windshield washer
and then every eleventh spray after that.
49
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Overview
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls
are located on the instrument panel below the
radio.
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls
50
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Automatic Climate Controls
51
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
52
Icon
Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
53
Icon
Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
54
Icon
Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm water.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
(Continued)
55
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust
the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the
front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
56
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
Recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off
the Recirculation mode and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. On systems
with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the
LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed,
the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various
weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front
of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum,
they could plug the water drains. In winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact your authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have
it replaced when needed.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
57
Operating Tips Chart
58
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect,
the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
down, for a short period of time, and release and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch down briefly and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of
time, and release and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction
and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this
happens, pull the switch lightly and hold
to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
59
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds after
the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, push and release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the
button with turn on). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button again (the indicator light on the button will
turn back off).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
in certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof
Power Sunroof Switch
Window Lockout Switch
60
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Manual
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement and the sunroof will
remain in a partially closed condition until the
sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
Sunshade Operation
Ignition Off Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as
the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be
closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
• This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there is a relearn procedure that allows you
to calibrate the sunroof when the “Auto Up”
feature stops working. To reset the sunroof,
follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed
position.
61
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof
will hit the hard stop and move to the Vent
position after 10 seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and
hold the Close switch again within 5 seconds
to begin the teaching process. The sunroof
will complete one full cycle and return to the
Fully Closed position.
NOTE:
If the Close switch is released anytime during the teach cycle, the procedure will need
to be repeated starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully
Closed position, release the Close switch.
The sunroof is now reset and ready to use.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to
the left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
62
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade
Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic
stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
stop position and a full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort stop position. Push the
switch rearward and release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
Opening Power Shade
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at
the comfort stop position. Push and hold the
switch rearward again, the sunroof will open to
the full open position and automatically stop.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in
a partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed and held rearward again.
Express
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position
when Express or Manual Open operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically
open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close.” During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement and the sunroof will
remain in a partially closed condition until the
sunroof switch is pushed again.
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop
automatically. Push the switch a second time
from the halfway position and the shade will
automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Push and
hold the shade switch rearward again and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed
again.
Closing Power Shade
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to
the half-open position. Pushing the shade
close button again will automatically close
both the sunroof and shade completely.
Manual
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement and the shade will
remain in a partially closed condition until the
switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the "Vent" button within onehalf second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position
when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway
open position prior to the sunroof opening
to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
63
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be
closed in Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
• This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the driver’s
door.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
NOTE:
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Accessory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
64
Closing The Hood
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
Sunroof Maintenance
Ignition Off Operation
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to
the left and lift the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in the instrument cluster display,
all doors will unlock when you push the
electronic release on the liftgate. If ⴖUnlock
Driver Door 1st Pressⴖ is programmed in
Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Opening
The liftgate can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the Power Liftgate button on the
overhead console, using the key fob outside of
the vehicle or the Electronic Liftgate Release.
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either
front door trim panel or the key fob to lock
and unlock the liftgate. The manual door
locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
• Key fob
To Lock The Liftgate
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
• Outside handle
• Button on Overhead Console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion. Push the button on
the key fob twice within five seconds to release
the liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate
Release
2 — Lock Button Location
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located
to the right of the outside handle release will lock
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
65
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may also be opened or
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on
the front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel,
near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on
the left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if
Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be
audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The
emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located
on the liftgate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
66
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate
if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle
speed is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150° F (65° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from
the liftgate before pushing any of the
power liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate
while it is closing or opening, the liftgate
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to
the side of the liftgate. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice to
operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is closing, the
liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop and the
liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
Two additional storage bins are located under
the load floor. To access the lower storage bins,
raise the load floor and attach the tether strap
(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the
liftgate opening.
Cargo Area Features
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the
left side of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps
out of the bezel when needed. The flashlight
features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place.
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Flashlight Power Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins
located in the rear cargo area. There are two
storage bins located on either side of the cargo
area.
Push Flashlight To Release
Tether Strap
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the storage bin on that side will not
be available.
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once
for high, twice for low, and a third time to return
to off.
Rear Lower Storage Bins
Rear Storage Bin
67
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not
to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo
from shifting or protect passengers from
loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it
over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into
the slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the
vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around
in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the
cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors
for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden
stop or accident, a hook could pull loose
and allow the child seat to come loose. A
child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to the
left door or left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
(Continued)
68
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile
in a sudden stop or accident.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on
the latch, and lower the glove compartment
door.
Opened Glove Compartment
Storage Compartment
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door
panels for easy access.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment Latches
Door Panel Storage
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access
the lower storage compartment.
69
WARNING! (Continued)
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/
reading lights and storage for sunglasses.
Power liftgate and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Lower Storage Compartment
Front Map/Reading Lights
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD
player located in the center console.
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights also turn on when a door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the
unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player —
If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
(Continued)
70
Lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Each light can be turned on by pushing the
switch on either side of the console. These
buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers located in the center console.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
Courtesy Lights
Electrical Power Outlets
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/
push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door
to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the rear seat
passengers located in the fold-down center armrest.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets
are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position,
while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are
connected directly to the battery and powered at
all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
Rear Cupholders
Sunglasses Bin Door
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a
MOPAR knob and element must be used.
71
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on the storage lid to
open the compartment and gain access to this
power outlet.
Center Console Outlet
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Front Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also
a power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
NOTE:
The rear power outlet can be switched from
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all the time. See your local
authorized dealer for details.
72
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 or 230 Volt, 150 Watt inverter
outlet located on the back of the center console
to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet
can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most
new computers and power tools.
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF
EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over
the luggage rack crossbars.
Power Inverter
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR
crossbars built specifically for this roof rack
system.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
(Continued)
73
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,
located at the upper edge of each crossbar,
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft
wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, place the front
and rear crossbars approximately
24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise
reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using
increments of 1 inches (2.5 cm).
• If any cargo (or any metallic object) is
placed over the satellite radio antenna (if
equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid
placing the rear crossbar over the satellite
radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at
high speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars installed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards,
or loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
74
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy
loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
• Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
• Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
• Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
• Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
• Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
• Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
• TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
• WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
• Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
• Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
• Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
• Green Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
• White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
• Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . .105
75
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
76
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather or up mountain grades. It should
not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of
the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call
an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
•
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter the
main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the
STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer Main Gauge
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
77
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• BACK/Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
Main Menu items.
78
Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main
Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button
for one second to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched-
uled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button
and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat
this procedure.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
• ACC Override
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button
and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate
Tire to XX”
• Service Air Bag System
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Instrument Cluster Display
Messages
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Speed Warning Set to XXX MPH
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Lights On
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Traction Control Off
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Washer Fluid Low
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Oil Pressure Low
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Oil Change Due
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Fuel Low
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
• Service Power Steering
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Cruise Off
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Cruise Ready
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Liftgate Open
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Service Air Suspension System
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride
Height
79
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please
Wait
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
the information submenus and push and release
the OK button to select or reset the resettable
submenus:
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled
Tire Pressure
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride
Height
Transmission Temperature
The Reconfigurable Telltales section are divided
into the white or green telltales area on the right,
and the amber or red telltales area on the left.
Oil Pressure — Gasoline Vehicle Only
Instrument Cluster Display Menu
Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your
vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to select the large
or small digital speedometer display. Push and
release the OK button to toggle units (mph
or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll through
80
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Oil Life
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Battery Voltage
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Terrain — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Air Suspension — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Drivetrain:
Front Wheel Angle
T-Case
Axle Lock
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Oil Temperature
• Wheel Articulation
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to display the SelecTerrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and Wheel
Articulation.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the following
will display in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.” for further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system
status and the conditions that need to be met.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.
• Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle
will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a
new Range value will display. Range cannot
be reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual
drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless
of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km. or km/L)
since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) form while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi
or km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the
last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as
needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display
• Full (default setting)
• Single
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
81
Upper Left
Current Gear
• None
• On
• Compass (default setting)
• Off (default setting)
• Outside Temp
Favorite Menus — Equipped
• Time
• Speedometer
• Range
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Average
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy Current
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Trip A
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
• Trip B
• Trip Info (show/hide)
Upper Right
• Stop/Start
• None
• Audio (show/hide)
• Compass
• Messages
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Screen Setup
• Time
• Speed Warning (show/hide)
• Range
The menu with (show/hide) means user can
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Restore
82
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to enter speed
warning. Use the up or down arrow button to
select a desired speed, then push and release
the OK button to set the speed. The Speed
Warning telltale will display in the instrument
cluster display, and a chime will sound with a
pop up warning message when the set speed is
exceeded.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver
Mode Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the
vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in “Warning And Indicator Lights
And Messages” located in ”Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the
capability of charging system. The charging
system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12V, 115V AC, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12V portable appliances
like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver
On” or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications
if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving
pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow buttons to select
Trip A or Trip B.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
83
Trip B
To Reset A Trip Function
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK
button to clear the resettable function being
displayed.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precaution-
ary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information
contained in the Owner Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always
refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may
not appear.
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During
the bulb check, if the driver’s or passenger seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
84
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the antilock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master
cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has
been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A
leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid
level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should
have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
85
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake
is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
86
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
87
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
88
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light
turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or
faster until the light turns off.
89
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Yellow Telltale Lights
Rear Fog Light Indicator
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
90
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on when placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to
the engine control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
91
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. It
should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
NOTE:
This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
92
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each
tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists.] When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
NOTE:
Some external parameters (eg; outdoor temperature) may affect TPMS info on your instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde(Continued)
93
CAUTION! (Continued)
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is
not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
94
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning (FCW) Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
95
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
96
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Low range provides a
greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and
proper use.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see your authorized dealer.
97
Air Suspension Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is actively adjusting the ride height.
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
98
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for
a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
Green Telltale Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
99
Turn Signal Warning Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn
signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
100
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
101
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
102
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is ready, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on and in the READY
state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
103
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when none or only the left or right lane marking
has been detected. The indicator will turn green when both lanes are detected and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped" in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Valet Mode Indicator Light
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Valet Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active. Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale Light
What It Means
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then
30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash
on/off.
104
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions,
engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well
within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see your authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s
Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
(Continued)
105
106
5
SAFETY
• SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation . . . . . . . .
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child Restraints — Carrying Children Safely . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . .
• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.108
.108
.108
.117
.117
.120
.122
.125
.125
.126
.126
.133
.140
.150
.150
.150
.151
.151
.153
107
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this selfcheck, you may hear a slight clicking sound as
well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock.
Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
108
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed
or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a
collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down
or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work to-
gether to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking
(RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control
(HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This
is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the driver releases the brake while stopped on
an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not
apply the throttle before this time expires, the
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with
a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer.
HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s respon(Continued)
109
WARNING! (Continued)
sibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
110
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC Off
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and
then an additional slightly more than one-half
turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then
back to ON. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and
the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is
released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more
vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when leaving your
vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system,
tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may
also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple
operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
111
Partial Off
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features
are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode,
push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display
in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn
off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the
ESC mode. Multiple momentary button
pushed may be required to return to ESC On.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited
slip feature described in the TCS section),
has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
112
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle
speed slows below the predetermined speed
the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode if
so equipped.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes if so equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and ESC OFF Indicator Light
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash
as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel
lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or
roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is turned ON.
113
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer
and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location,
and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
114
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically
apply a small amount of brake pressure to
remove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver
and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC
and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that
provides torque at the steering wheel for certain
driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the
steering wheel receives is only meant to help
the driver realize optimal steering behavior in
order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The
only notification the driver receives that the
feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the
driver realize the correct course of action
through small torques on the steering wheel,
which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving
while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override
Feedback To The Driver
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
Disabling HDC
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission.
When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
115
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low
Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by
actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
• SSC performance is influenced by the
Terrain Select mode. This difference may
be notable to the driver and may be perceived
as
a
varying
level
of
aggressiveness.
SSC Target Set Speeds
Driver Override:
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
Enabling SSC
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:
• Driver releases throttle.
• Driver releases brake.
116
sion. While actively controlling SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for
the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
NOTE:
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmis-
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/
front/side of the vehicle.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off
road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES
NOT change if your vehicle is towing a
trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports
equipment) extends beyond the side of
your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
warning light remaining illuminated the
entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
(3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors
are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
117
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear, front)
while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The
BSM system will issue an alert during these
types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring
Sensor Location
Overtaking Traffic
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” for further information.
Side Monitoring
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/
h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Warning Light Location
Overtaking/Approaching
118
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects.
This is normal operation and your vehicle does
not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other
structures or vehicles, the system will not be
able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing
the radio volume.
119
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is
muted.
120
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert
in the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on
that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at
the same time, both the visual and audible alerts
will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by
the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off.
Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to
warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate
the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver
does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help
slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the
collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force
as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/
h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard
rails or sign posts based on the course
prediction. This is expected and is a part
of
normal
FCW
activation
and
functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after
four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next
ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road
use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road,
the FCW system should be deactivated to
prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low
Range or ESC Full-Off Mode is active, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking
and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located in the
Uconnect display in the controls settings.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system back on, press the
forward collision button again.
Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is defaulted to on
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will reset to on when
the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the Active Braking is in the “on”
setting. This allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warning when the latter is at a farther
distance than "Medium" setting. This provides
the most reaction time to avoid a possible
collision.
121
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the
distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer
present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
Changing the Active Braking status to “off” prevents the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the driver
is not braking adequately in the event of a
potential frontal collision.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects
such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may
122
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires —
When the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of
14 psi (96 kPa) or lower, always check tire
pressure and replace the tire at the first
opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below
14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode
of operation. In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) for a maximum distance of
50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does not
recommend using the run flat feature while
driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or
towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer
to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold tire pressure. Once
the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure
may need to be increased up to an additional
4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold
placard pressure in order to turn the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have
been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using
an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
123
activated, when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message and a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) in a different color.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI, BAR or kPa.
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your
tires and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire
pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, and an audible chime will be
124
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a
different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure
may need to be increased up to an additional
4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold
placard pressure in order to turn the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected. The
system fault will also sound a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five
seconds. This message is then followed by a
graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the pressure
value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash,
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will not
be present, and a pressure value will be dis-
played instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor
in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
remain ON, a chime will sound, and the
instrument cluster display will still display a
pressure value in the different color graphic
display. After driving the vehicle for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
display will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEMⴖ message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and
the instrument cluster display will display a
ⴖSERVICE TPM SYSTEMⴖ message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall
it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM
Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
125
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a
rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that you
are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
Warning Label On Front Passenger Sun Visor
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
126
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If
Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se-
quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled
again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
127
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in
your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always
wear their seat belts whether or not an air
bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
128
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to your authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the shoulder belt.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt
if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk
of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
129
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
higher position. After you release the anchorage
button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
130
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature.
This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release
button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage
is latched, pull downward on the shoulder
belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on
your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the
event of an accident is reduced for the mother
and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat
belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and
positioned properly.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an
Energy Management feature in the front seating
positions that may help further reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — (If Equipped)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to
secure a child restraint system. For additional
information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
How To Engage The Automatic Locking
Mode
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s midsection so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s midsection. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a "click."
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking
Mode
131
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt
function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the
Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or
may not deploy in the event of a front or side
impact. However, if during a front impact, a
secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may
deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and
Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic
Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seatback
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
(Continued)
132
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting
and positioning the head restraint, refer to
“Active Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head restraint
will be extended forward and separated from the
rear half of the head restraint (see image). Do
not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have
deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant
for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA US
LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result
in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if
the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
133
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
134
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may
also be disabled. In this condition the air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In
addition, a single chime will sound to alert you
that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” section
of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
“Base” Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for ex135
ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their
full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
136
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side
air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard
side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of
the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or
vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the trim out of the way and
covers the window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items
in your vehicle which could alter the roof.
Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are
designed to activate in certain side impacts and
certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side
impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on
the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
(Continued)
137
WARNING! (Continued)
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side
Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only.
138
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Rollover Events
• Air Bag Warning Light
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether
the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on
the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or
not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
• Steering Wheel and Column
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines
if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both
sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect
you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies re-
WARNING! (Continued)
placed by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
139
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
140
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
Child Restraints — Carrying
Children Safely
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraint Safety Label
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. EC
directive 2003/20/EC requires proper use of
restraints in all EC countries.
Children less than 1.5 meters tall and 12 years
or younger should ride properly buckled up in a
rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured.
Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Children should ride rearward facing as long as
possible; this is the most protected position for a
child in the event of a crash. Always check the
child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully
read and follow all the instructions and warnings
in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
In Europe, children restraint systems are defined by regulation ECE-R44, which divides
them into five weight groups:
Restraint Group
Weight Group
Group 0
up to 10 kg
Group 0+
up to 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 3
22-36 kg
Check the label of your child restraint. All approved child restraints must include typeapproval data and the control mark on its label.
The label must be permanently secured to the
child restraint system. You should not remove
this label from the child restraint.
WARNING!
Extreme Hazard! Do not place a rear-facing
child restraint in front of an active air bag.
Refer to visor mounted labels for information.
Deployment of the air bag in an accident
could cause fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of the collision. It is
advisable to always carry children in a child
restraint system on the rear seat, which is the
most protected position in the event of a
collision.
“Universal” Child Restraint Systems
The figures in the following sections are examples of each type of universal child restraint
system. Typical installations are shown. Always
install your child restraint system according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions,
which must be included with this type of restraint
system.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” for the steps to
properly lock the seat belt over the child restraint.
Child restraint systems with ISOFIX anchorages
are available for installing the child restraint
system to the vehicle without using the vehicle’s
seat belts.
Group 0 And 0+
Fig. A
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward facing in the vehicle as long as possible. Infants up to 13 kg must be restrained in a
rear-facing seat like the child seat shown in fig.
A. This type of child restraint supports the child’s
head and does not induce stress on the neck in
the event of sudden decelerations or a crash.
The rear-facing child restraint is restrained by
the vehicle’s seat belts, as shown in fig. A. The
child seat restrains the child with its own harness.
141
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Group 2
Group 3
Group 1
Fig. C
Fig. D
Children who weigh between 15 kg and 25 kg
and who are too big for the Group 1 child
restraint may use a Group 2 child restraint
system.
Children who weigh between 22 kg and 36 kg
and who are tall enough to use the adult shoulder belt may use a Group 3 child restraint.
Group 3 child restraints position the lap belt on
the child’s pelvis. The child must be tall enough
that the shoulder belt crosses the child’s chest
and not their neck.
As shown in fig. C, the Group 2 child restraint
system positions the child correctly with respect
to the seat belt so that the shoulder belt crosses
the child’s chest and not the neck, and the lap
belt is snug on the pelvis and not the abdomen.
Fig. B
Children who weigh between 9 kg and 18 kg
may be carried in a Group 1, forward facing seat
like the one in fig. B. This type of child restraint
is for older children who are too big for a Group
0 or 0+ child restraint.
142
Fig. D shows an example of a Group 3 child
restraint system correctly positioning the child
on the rear seat.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the
child restraint attachments. Remove the
WARNING! (Continued)
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Suitability Of Passenger Seats For
Universal Child Restraint System Use
According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC,
the suitability of each passenger seat position
for the installation of Universal Child Restraint
Systems is shown in the following table:
(Continued)
Mass Group
Universal Child Seating Position Chart (or other site)
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard
Rear Center
Group 0 - Up to 10 kg
X
U
U
Group 0+ - Up to 13 kg
X
U
U
Group 1 - 9 to 18 kg
X
U
U
Group II & III - 15 to 36 kg
X
U
U
Key of letters used in the table above:
• U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this age/weight
group.
• X = Seat position not suitable for children in
this age/weight group.
143
Seat Belts For Older Children
Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat
belts instead of using child restraints.
seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether
the seat belt properly fits the child or if they
should still use a Group 2 or Group 3 child
restraint to improve the fit of the seat belt:
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while they are
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
ISOFIX Restraint System
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
meets the seatback and a top tether anchorage
located behind the seating position.
An example of a Universal ISOFIX child restraint
system for weight group 1 is shown in fig. E.
ISOFIX child restraints are also available in the
other weight groups.
Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round
bars that are found at the rear of the
seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are
just visible when you lean into the
rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a Group 2 or
3 child restraint in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can
move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster
144
Fig. E
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called ISOFIX. This system
allows ISOFIX-equipped child seats to be installed without using the vehicle’s seat belts.
The ISOFIX system has two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Locating The Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this
will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
ISOFIX child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar on each side. Each will have a
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints may also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not install your ISOFIX child restraint
system using the center tether anchorage.
Use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “Installing The ISOFIX Child
Restraint System” for typical installation
instructions.
Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the
plastic seat backing.
Center Seat ISOFIX
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the ISOFIX system. This
position is not approved for any type of
ISOFIX child restraint system.
(Continued)
145
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm
rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
Suitability Of Passenger Seats For ISOFIX
Child Restraint System Use
The table below shows the various installation
possibilities for ISOFIX child restraint systems
on seats fitted with ISOFIX anchorages in accordance with European standard ECE 16.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the
plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart
Size Class
F
ISO/L1
X
X
X
Carrycot
G
ISO/L2
X
X
X
(1)
X
X
X
ISO/R1
X
IUF/IUF
X
(1)
X
X
X
E
ISO/R1
X
IUF/IUF
X
D
ISO/R2
X
IUF/IUF
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IUF/IUF
X
(1)
X
X
X
0 — up to 10 kg
0+ — up to 13 kg
146
E
Fixture
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard Rt./
Lt.
Mass Group
Rear Center
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart
Size Class
Fixture
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard Rt./
Lt.
Rear Center
D
ISO/R2
X
IUF/IUF
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IUF/IUF
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF/IUF
X
B1
ISO/F2X
X
IUF/IUF
X
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF/IUF
X
(1)
X
X
X
II – 15 to 25 kg
(1)
X
X
X
III – 22 to 36 kg
(1)
X
X
X
Mass Group
I – 9 to 18 kg
Key of letters used in the table above:
• (1) = For the CRS which do not carry the
ISO/XX size class identification (A to G), for
the applicable mass group, the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recommended
for each position.
• IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems in this mass group
and/or this size class.
• *IUF = With the seat in the mid-track position,
seat back must be adjusted so that it does not
touch the child seat.
• **IUF = The Carrycot F & G can only be
installed with the convertible top in the down
position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here. When
using a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system, you can only use approved child restraint systems with the marking ECE R44
(release R44/03 or superior) “Universal ISOFIX”.
To Install An ISOFIX Child Restraint:
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt,
stow the seat belt, following the instructions
below. See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connectors and on the tether strap of the child seat
so that you can more easily attach the connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline
the seat and / or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
147
3. Attach the connectors of the child restraint to
the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
25 mm in any direction.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to
the ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
148
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• Install the child restraint system when the
vehicle is stationary. The ISOFIX child restraint system is correctly fixed to the
brackets when you hear the click.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On
Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the rear passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed
to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is
locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while
the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the ISOFIX attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the ISOFIX
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
149
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do
not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that
they should not play with them.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of
the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room for
the child seat.
150
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor.
Then, allow the webbing to retract back into
the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull out
any webbing. If the retractor is not locked,
repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
25 mm in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips since vehicle equipped with a gas engine
the following applies:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged
parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat fasten151
ers so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat
• ALWAYS securely attach
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
beFLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
fore installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat on
top of an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured
to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
(Continued)
152
WARNING! (Continued)
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor
mat and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if
fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
153
154
6
STARTING AND OPERATING
• STARTING PROCEDURES — GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . .
• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STARTING PROCEDURES — DIESEL ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Extreme Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal Starting Procedure — Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . .
• Starting Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cold Weather Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Engine Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cooling System Tips — Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .
• STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop . . . . . . . . . .
• To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — 3.6L & 5.7L ENGINES
• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — DIESEL ENGINES . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.159
.159
.159
.160
.160
.160
.160
.161
.161
.161
.162
.162
.163
.164
.164
.165
.165
.165
.166
.166
.166
.167
.167
.167
.167
.168
155
• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped .
• Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped .
• Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Shifting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Selec-Terrain Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY — IF EQUIPPED .
• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.168
.169
.170
.170
.170
.171
.175
.175
.175
.176
.176
.177
.178
.178
.178
.180
.181
.181
.182
.182
.183
.183
.183
.183
.184
.184
.184
.185
.185
.185
.185
.186
.187
.187
•
•
•
•
• To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ACC Operation At Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED. .
• ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .
• Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System
• Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . . . . . . . .
• Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display . . . . .
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LaneSense Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.187
.188
.188
.188
.188
.189
.191
.191
.191
.192
.193
.194
.196
.197
.197
.197
.199
.199
.200
.200
.201
.202
.202
.202
.205
.205
.206
.206
.207
.208
.208
.212
.216
.216
157
•
•
•
•
•
•
158
• Turning LaneSense On Or Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
• LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
• Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .219
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
• Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
• Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
• Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
• Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) —
Non SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
• Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit Models) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . .235
• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
• Recreational Towing-Two Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
• Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I (Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
• Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
• On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
• Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
STARTING PROCEDURES —
GASOLINE ENGINES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake. Always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF”
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
Automatic Transmission
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
159
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is
pushed twice to the OFF mode. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the
instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not
In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity
and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions —
With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In
PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes,
OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition modes
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display “ACC”),
160
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”),
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Cold Weather Operation (Below
–22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING PROCEDURES —
DIESEL ENGINES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your
seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 30second intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake. Always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF”
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature could result in evident white smoke.
This condition will disappear as the engine
warms up.
CAUTION!
• The engine is allowed to crank as long as
30 seconds. If the engine fails to start
during this period, please wait at least two
minutes for the starter to cool before repeating start procedure.
• If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START engine before
you drain the water from the fuel filters to
avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining
Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission gear
selector in the PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Extreme Cold Weather
The engine block heater is a resistance heater
installed in the water jacket of the engine. It
requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its use is
recommended for environments that routinely
fall below -10°F (-23°C). It should be used when
the vehicle has not been running overnight or
longer periods and should be plugged in two
hours prior to start. Its use is required for cold
starts with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from
your authorized MOPAR dealer.
• A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in thermostat.
• A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of white
smoke generated by a warming engine.
Normal Starting Procedure —
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights
when starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
161
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is
possible under very cold conditions. The
ⴖWait to Startⴖ telltale will be illuminated
during the pre-heat process, When the engine Wait To Start light goes off the engine
will automatically crank.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/
Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
3. The system will automatically engage the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light has
turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
162
Starting Fluids
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating system. If the instructions in this manual
are followed, the engine should start in all
conditions and no type of starting fluid should be
used.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build up may cause serious injury or
death.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
NORMAL OPERATION —
DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating.
• All message center lights are off.
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
• Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
• Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by
the glow plug heating system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module. Glow
plug heater operation can run for several minutes, once the heater operation is complete the
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
Cold Weather Precautions
Fuel Operating Range
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
following charts suggest these options:
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only
be used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/18°C) exist”.
163
NOTE:
• Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
Fuel or Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in
fuel economy.
• Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is
a blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels
which reduces the temperature at which
wax crystals form in fuel.
• The fuel grade should be clearly marked
on the pump at the fuel station.
• The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel
could result in engine and exhaust system
damage. Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information.
• If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel
is not available, and you are operating
164
below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to
avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating Range
Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the correct engine oil viscosity.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
before full loads are applied.
bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low
that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings, cylinder head valves, and
injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can
enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing
rapid wear to the engine.
Stopping The Engine
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few
minutes before shutting it down. This idle period
will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry
excess heat away from the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
Engine Idling
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because com-
Driving Condition
Load
Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go
Empty
Cool
None
Stop and Go
Medium
Highway Speeds
Medium
Warm
1.0
0.5
City Traffic
Maximum GCWR
1.5
Highway Speeds
Maximum GCWR
2.0
Uphill Grade
Maximum GCWR
Hot
2.5
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will
run after the engine is turned off. These
conditions are under high load and high
temperature conditions.
Cooling System Tips — Automatic
Transmission
To reduce the potential for engine and transmission overheating in high ambient temperature
conditions, take the following actions:
• City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine
idle speed.
• Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
• Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
• Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE:
If the coolant temperature is too high the A/C
will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut the engine off immediately. Failure
to do so could result in immediate and severe
engine damage.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the
engine requires service. Some important clues
are:
• Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
• Sudden loss of power.
• Unusual engine noises.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the low oil pressure warning light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the
engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
when the light turns on.
• Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
• Sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in the engine operating
temperature.
• Excessive smoke.
• Oil pressure drop.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP
ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
165
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
166
• Hood is open.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
• Accelerator pedal input.
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• Engine temp too high.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous
AUTOSTOP.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To
Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
STOP/START Off Switch
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
STOP/START system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF
EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the
engine oil dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the
injector harness.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display,
have the system checked by your authorized
dealer.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS — 3.6L &
5.7L ENGINES
quired for the drivetrain (engine, transmission,
clutch, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to
a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in "Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L
use the following engine break-in recommendations: A long break-in period is not re167
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator
often during the break in period. Add oil as
required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINES
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal operation
is allowed, providing the following recommendations are followed:
• Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
• Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
• Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
168
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer
towing or no load operation will extend the
time before the engine is at full efficiency.
Reduced fuel economy and power may be
seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades are shown under
“Fluids And Lubricants” in "Technical Specifications” in this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel.
To apply the park brake, firmly push the park
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake,
press the park brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the “Brake”
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the
“Brake” Warning Light will flash. If vehicle
speed is detected, a chime will sound to
alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking
brake is applied. It does not show the
degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Apply the parking brake before placing the gear
selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before
exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
169
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always apply the parking brake,
shift the transmission into PARK, and turn
the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock
the vehicle.
(Continued)
170
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out
of PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal
must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve
the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “ECO” switch in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate
or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch
indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
times occurs when operating in ECO mode. An
onboard frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the audio system to
help keep the vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic
Transmission
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change
the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will
operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed
range. Refer to the section on Quadra-Lift for
further information.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation — Summit
Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system uses four
microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise, which some-
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, press
the lock button on the gear selector and move
the selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
You must also press the brake pedal to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). Select the DRIVE
range for normal driving.
The
electronically-controlled
transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping
the shift paddles (+/-), will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
171
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage
before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake,
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
• Turn the ignition OFF and,
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
172
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting
a vehicle, always apply the parking brake,
shift the transmission into PARK, and turn
the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock
the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear
range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position
(P), and is not blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK position (when pushed forward), it is
probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode,
the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission
into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a
heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
173
(refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position) enables full manual control of
transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick
mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded
and the engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indi174
cator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message
in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not
re-engage after engine shutdown, perform
this procedure only in a desired location
(preferably, at your authorized dealer).
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns OFF.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows
you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve
overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position), or tap one of the shift
paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-)
shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will
retain the current gear. The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL position), or the shift
paddles, to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the
MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift
paddle on the steering wheel, will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the
selector rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift
paddle) will command an upshift.
NOTE:
The shift paddles may be disabled (or reenabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Personal Settings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver (using the gear selector, or the shift
paddles), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a
stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range,
Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at a
stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful
in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding
the gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+)
shift paddle (if the gear selector is already in
DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up for
typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all set to their
SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified shifting
for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may
be activated and deactivated by pushing the
Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If
Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction is
required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel
that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
175
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” further
on in this section for further information on
the various positions and their intended usages.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is
recommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving
Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Quadra-Trac II Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If
Equipped
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode.
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• 4WD HI
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD
HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD
LOW position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The
4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
176
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the
transfer case.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice,
snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain – If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions
and their intended usages.
once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash and go out when the shift is complete.
Shifting Procedures
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met,
or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 High
Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N
push 4 Low” message will flash from the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or
the engine running, shift the transmission into
“N”, and push the “4WD LOW” button once on
the transfer case switch. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to
flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE:
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button
NOTE:
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped;
however, difficulty may occur due to the
mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required
for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the
transfer case will not allow the shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without
WARNING! (Continued)
first fully engaging the parking brake. The
NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the
engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL
(N) is complete. A “NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
(Continued)
177
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
Procedure in Owner’s Manual” message will
flash from the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features
two torque transfer couplings. The couplings
include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential
(ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer
case. The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic
and requires no driver input to operate. Under
normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a
standard axle, balancing torque evenly between
left and right wheels. With a traction difference
between left and right wheels, the coupling will
sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins
to spin faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less
traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the
transfer case and axle coupling differ in design,
their operation is similar. Follow the QuadraTrac II transfer case shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting this system.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
178
Quadra-Drive II System — If
Equipped
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push
of a button. The vehicle will automatically raise
and lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the
vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride height
and when operating in off-road modes, the
vehicle will raise the ride height accordingly. The
buttons near the terrain switch in the center
console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
Selec-Terrain Switch
1 — UP Button
2 — DOWN Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the
standard position of the suspension and is
meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1.1 inches (28 mm) – This is
the primary position for all off-road driving
until OR2 is needed. A smoother and more
comfortable ride will result. Push the “UP”
button once from the NRH position while the
vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h).
When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH. Refer to “Driving
Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2.2 inches (55 mm) – This
position is intended for off-roading use only
where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the “UP” button
twice from the NRH position or once from the
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
height will be automatically lowered to OR1.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 inches (15 mm) – This position
provides improved aerodynamics by lowering
the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically
enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed
remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and
56 mph (90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph
(90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from
Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless
of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in “SPORT”
mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This
position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear
of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push
the “DOWN” button once from (NRH) while
the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for
greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit
Mode change will be cancelled. To exit Entry/
Exit Mode, press the “Up” button once while
in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle over
15 mph (24 km/h).
179
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
Exit Mode can be enabled through the
Uconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature
is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the
gear selector is in ⴖPARKⴖ, the terrain switch
is in ⴖAUTOⴖ, the transfer-case is in ⴖAUTO”
and the vehicle level should be either in
Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not
automatically lower if the air suspension
level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module
(ITM), the lowering will be suppressed when
the ignition is switched OFF and the door is
open to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of
the vehicle will move up first and then the front.
When lowering the vehicle, the front will move
down first and then the rear.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The
height can be changed from the default SelecTerrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The system requires that the engine be running
for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed.
If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed
until the open door(s) is closed.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To
avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your authorized dealer for service.
180
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly,
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the QuadraLift air suspension system has a feature which
allows the automatic leveling to be disabled.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the
air suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit
ride height. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle
into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
mum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc.)
Suspension Display Messages Mode
Operation
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you to only display suspension warnings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which
the system is working to achieve. When raising,
if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the
“Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp
is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing
on the "Up" button the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Instrument Cluster Display
Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the current
position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.
engine running, speed below threshold, etc).
The “UP” button can be pushed multiple times,
each push will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the
highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be pressed
multiple times. Each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a mini-
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and
6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and
5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp
4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this
position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit
Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while
vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will
remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash
as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce
speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp
4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash
until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which
point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during
the height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
height change will be paused until the vehicle
181
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension,
the default ride height for Sand is Normal
Ride Height (NRH).
speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h)
and the height change continues to Entry/Exit
Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the
vehicle height will return to NRH. Entry/Exit
Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not
moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed.
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Tire/Jack Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps
3 and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driving
will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF
EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
182
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
in Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If
equipped with air suspension, the default ride
height for Snow is Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off Road 1.
• Rock – Off road calibration only available in
4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction based tuning with
improved steer-ability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle
level will change to Off-Road 2. If the SelecTerrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the
transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to
4WD High, the Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
NOTE:
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control.
See “Electronic Brake Control System” in
this section for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display
Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY
5.7L ENGINE ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to
full functionality after a battery disconnect.
parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” within
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is
displayed within the instrument
cluster display, this indicates the vehicle needs
to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
• Even if the power steering assistance is
no longer operational, it is still possible to
steer the vehicle. Under these conditions
there will be a substantial increase in
183
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control
on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been, set a
message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Activate
To Vary The Speed Setting
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate
the Speed Control is on. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. CRUISE
CONTROL OFF will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Increase Speed
184
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed
up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED
ways. However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control
function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set
speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed)
automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining
an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major road185
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware
of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention
is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
186
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result
in wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes
in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within 3 minutes
the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control
On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting
Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting
Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
19 mph (30 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in
PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver’s door is open at low
speeds.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET + button or the SET - button and
release. The instrument cluster display will display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 19 mph (30 km/h), the set speed shall be
defaulted to 19 mph (30 km/h). If the system is
187
set when the vehicle speed is above 19 mph
(30 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
To Turn Off
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster display.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button is pushed.
To Cancel
To Resume
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
188
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the system
will cancel and the brake force will be
ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
NOTE:
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET - button.
• When you override and push the SET +
button or SET - buttons, the new Set
Speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
• The ACC system maintains set speed
when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate
hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance
setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates
and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down
to a full stop when following a target
vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a
target vehicle to a standstill, the host
vehicle will release the vehicle brakes two
seconds after coming to a full stop.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
189
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the
brakes manually, if necessary.
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
190
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take
action and does not necessarily mean that
the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. In locations with left hand
drive traffic, an additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal
and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side. In locations with right hand drive
traffic, an additional acceleration is triggered
when the driver utilizes the right turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the right
hand side.
NOTE:
When the vehicle transitions from a location
with left hand drive traffic to a location with
right hand drive traffic or vice-versa, the
ACC system will automatically detect the
direction of traffic.
of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and
the brakes will release. A cancel message will
display on the instrument cluster display and
produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds
ment cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
• System Off
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instru-
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
191
• The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects
in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind
the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
192
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip)
without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the
grille is not recommended. Doing so may
block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will display “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return
to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip)
without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized
dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system fault
or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC
again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original Set
Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be
limited.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turn Or Bend Example
Offset Driving Condition Example
193
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
ACC Hill Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In
the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect
the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system
to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. There may not
be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control can only
be operated if the vehicle speed is above
19 mph (30 km/h).
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
194
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle
Example
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed
was set. This light will turn on when the system
is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green
when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET + button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET - button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
195
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
196
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected
obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if
the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
move toward the rear of the vehicle from
the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the
Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking
function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
• The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas
pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear
while the automatic brakes are being applied.
NOTE:
• Automatic brakes will not be available if
ESC is not available.
• The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle’s acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle’s movements.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if
there is a faulted condition detected with
the ParkSense Park Assist system or the
Braking System Module.
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
• The automatic braking function may only
be applied if the vehicle deceleration is
not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
• The automatic braking function may not
be applied fast enough for obstacles that
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is en-
abled at this gear selector position, the system
will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been detected, the warning display
will turn on indicating the system status.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between
the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
197
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
198
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(150-100 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
Arcs-Left
None
None
None
None
None
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
None
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an
audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
199
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is
turned OFF, the instrument cluster display
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a
tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system
not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind
the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing
the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the
liftgate is in the open position and the
vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
200
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically
applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a
possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas
pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear
while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if
there is a faulted condition detected with
the ParkSense Park Assist system or the
Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only
be applied if the vehicle deceleration is
not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function will not be
available if vehicle is in 4LO transfer case
mode.
• The automatic braking function may not
be applied fast enough for obstacles that
move toward the rear of the vehicle from
the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the
Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking
function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if
ESC is not available.
201
NOTE:
ParkSense Sensors
ParkSense Display
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been detected, the warning display
will turn on indicating the system status.
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle’s acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense
is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
speed. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
202
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between
the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone
Slow Tone
Fast Tone For Rear Only
Continuous Tone
203
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
instrument cluster display shows one flashing
arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following
chart shows the warning alert operation when
the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(150-100 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
Arcs-Left
None
None
None
None
None
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
None
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
204
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
None
None
Fast
Continuous
Arcs-Left
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs-Center
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an
audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
FRONT
SENSORS",
or
the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the
gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display a
205
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up
message for five seconds. After five seconds, a
vehicle graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the
side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected
within the five second pop-up duration. The
vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
206
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is
turned off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a
tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system
not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind
or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could
provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing
the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the
liftgate is in the open position. An opened
liftgate could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/visual
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene
as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after
being instructed to remove their hands
from the steering wheel, the system will
cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as
heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a
parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must
have at least 30 miles accumulated before
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
207
Enabling And Disabling The
ParkSense Active Park Assist
System
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
• Touching the steering wheel during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down.
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel.
The driver must then reactivate the system
by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park
Assist switch.
• Driver’s door is opened.
• Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking
System intervention.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch Location
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
208
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between
DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward
gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within
six shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or in a forward gear (manual transmission).
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
activated.
• Driver’s door is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
• The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display. You
may switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space
setting.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use
the turn signal indicator to select which
side of the vehicle you want to perform the
parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically
search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the turn signal
is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that
the selected parking space is suitable for
the maneuver and free/clear of anything
that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates,
etc.
from
surrounding
objects/vehicles).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands
From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
• When seeking for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the
REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
209
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semiautomatic parking maneuver.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
• When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering
wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
210
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
will allow a maximum of six shifts between
DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver
should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position.
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver
should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into the
DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the
REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
Check Surroundings — STOP
211
position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active
ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"
message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE:
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking
Position
Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation/Display
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will
be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking
position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle
212
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching Push OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will show in the instrument cluster display. Push
the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back
to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular
parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK to Switch to Parallel”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
• When searching for a parking space, use
the turn signal indicator to select which
side of the vehicle you want to perform the
parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically
search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the turn signal
is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that
the selected parking space is suitable for
the maneuver and free/clear of anything
that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates,
etc.
from
surrounding
objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands
From Wheel
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the
REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semiautomatic parking maneuver.
213
• When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering
wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
will allow a maximum of six shifts between
DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h)
that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
214
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver
should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
When the driver places the gear selector into the
DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver
should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is
required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To
Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the
REVERSE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — STOP
215
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
position. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the
vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking
Position
216
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly
is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of
the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning
will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED
in LaneSense button will illuminated while the
system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
LaneSense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
LaneSense Warning Button
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
217
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
218
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid green
when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is on to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
• For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the
warnings.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector
is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the
rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the rear view
image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
• The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
219
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may
be selected through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Zone
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
220
the rear of the vehicle. The following table
shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the
Rear View Camera can be activated with the
in the Controls
“Rear View Camera” button
menu. This feature allows the customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer,
if equipped) for up to ten seconds while at
speed. If the vehicle speed remains below
8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image
will be displayed continuously wntil deactivated
via the “X” button on the touchscreen.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
door open.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
Fuel Filler Door Latch
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
221
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin
to the center, this will pop up the outboard
edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the
manual release cable has been activated, the
actuator latch should be manually returned
to the closed position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Fuel Fill Location
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,
push the release cable back to the home
position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the
closed position.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the filler pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Release Cable
222
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to
allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire kit.
Fuel Fill Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
NOTE:
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
and fuel tank is essential. Refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire kit.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance
of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with water will promote the growth of
“microbes.” These microbes form “slime” that
will clog the fuel filtration system and lines. Drain
condensation from the supply tank and change
the line filter on a regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Dealer
Service / Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel
Emergency Fuel Fill Location
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic Reduction system to meet the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
223
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from
engines) that are harmful to our health and the
environment to a near-zero level. Small quantities of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected
into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where,
when vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2)
and water vapor (H2O), two natural components
of the air we breathe. You can operate with the
comfort that your vehicle is contributing to a
cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the
emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following components:
• DEF tank
• DEF pump
• DEF injector
• Electronically-heated DEF lines
• NOx sensors
• Temperature sensors
• SCR catalyst
224
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst
enable the achievement of diesel emissions
requirements; while maintaining outstanding
fuel economy, drivability, torque and power ratings.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for system
messages and warnings.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear
an audible clicking noise from under the
vehicle at a stop. This is normal operation.
• The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation and may
be audible from the rear of the vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12° F (-11° C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to
know that:
• Any containers or parts that come into
contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to
corrosion by DEF.
• If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster display) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the
“Technical Specifications” section for the
correct fluid type.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in
fuel door).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill
inlet.
NOTE:
• The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to update after adding a gallon or
more of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the
DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See your authorized dealer
for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of
the DEF fluid is below 12F (-11C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
CAUTION!
• To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do not
“top off” the DEF tank after filling.
• DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
to work in temperatures below the DEF
freezing point, however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could be
damaged.
• When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with water and use an absorbent
material to soak up the spills on the
ground.
• Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF
is accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
as it can result in severe damage to your
engine, including but not limited to failure of
the fuel pump and injectors.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of
these, less than 100 parts per million or
less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters)
will contaminate the entire DEF system
and will require replacement. If owners use
a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling
the tank, it should either be new or one that
is has only been used for adding DEF.
MOPAR provides an attachable nozzle
with its DEF for this purpose.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when
any of the following happen: DEF stops
flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF fill
inlet, DEF splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF
pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
225
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2 267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use
(Continued)
226
WARNING! (Continued)
a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Breakaway Cable Attachment
European braking regulations for braked trailers
up to 7,700 lbs (3 500 kg), require trailers to be
fitted with either a secondary coupling or breakaway cable.
The recommended location for attaching the
normal trailer’s breakaway cable is in the
stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch
receiver.
With Attachment Point
• For detachable tow bar pass the cable
through the attachment point and clip it back
onto itself or attach the clip directly to the
designated point.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method
• For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly to
the designated point. This alternative must be
specifically permitted by the trailer manufacturer since the clip may not be sufficiently
strong for use in the way.
Without Attachment Points
• For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow
the recommended manufacturer or supplier
procedure.
• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around
the neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cable like
this, use a single loop only.
Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method
Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method
Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method
227
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — Non SRT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) — with
Trailer Brake
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) — without Trailer Brake
Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.6L Gasoline — Standard
Cooling System
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
174 lbs (79 kg)
3.6L Gasoline — Heavy
Duty Cooling System
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
310 lbs (141 kg)
5.7L Gasoline — Standard
Cooling System
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
5.7L Gasoline — Heavy
Duty Cooling System (except Summit)
7,716 lbs (3,500 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
386 lbs (175 kg)
5.7L Gasoline — Summit
Models With Heavy Duty
Cooling System
6,500 lbs (2,949 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
386 lbs (175 kg)
3.0L Diesel — Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
6,500 lbs (2,949 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
324 lbs (147 kg)
3.0L Diesel — All-Wheel
Drive Models (except Summit)
7,716 lbs (3,500 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
386 lbs (175 kg)
3.0L Diesel — Summit Models
6,500 lbs (2,949 kg)
1,653 lbs (750 kg)
324 lbs (147 kg)
Engine/Transmission
When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
228
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover
Removal (Summit Models) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access
the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch
receiver cover is located at the bottom center of
the rear fascia.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you), pull downwards to disengage the
tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver
cover.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot
of the locking retainer if needed for added
leverage.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Hitch Receiver Cover
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch
receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered
as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing
repeat the procedure in reverse order.
Hitch Receiver Cover
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
229
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer
towing as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
230
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow
vehicle transmission in PARK. For fourwheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer
such that the following four ratings are
not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with
a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with
that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing
a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge
actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload
your brake system and cause it to fail. You
might not have brakes when you need
them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in a collision.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a fourand seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
13–Pin Connector — If Equipped
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
231
Pin Number
Function
Wire Color
1
Left Turn Signal
Black/White
2
Rear Fog Light
White
Ground/Common Return for Contacts (Pins)
1 and 2 and 4 to 8
Brown
4
Right Turn Signal
Black/Green
5
Right Rear Position, Side Marker Lights, and
Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device. b
Green/Red
3
a
6
Stop Lights
Black/Red
7
Left Rear Position, Side Marker Lights, and
Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device. b
Green/Black
8
Reverse lights
Blue/Red
9
Permanent Power Supply (+12V)
Red
10
Power Supply Controlled by Ignition Switch
(+12V)
Yellow
Return for Contact (Pin) 10
Yellow/Brown
11
a
12
13
a
Reserve for Future Allocation
–
Return for Contact (Pin) 9
Red/Brown
NOTE:
The allocation pin 12 has been changed from “Coding for coupled Trailer” to “Reserve for Future Allocation.”
a
The three return circuits shall not be connected electrically in the trailer.
b
The rear position registration plate illumination device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common connection with both pins
5 and 7.
232
Towing Tips
AutoStick
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent downshifts.
For example, choose “5” if the desired speed
can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE,
select TOW mode, or use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using TOW mode, or selecting a lower gear
(using the AutoStick shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup. This action will
also provide better engine braking.
TOW Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission overheating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear (using
the AutoStick shift paddles) on more severe
grades.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear
or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
233
Trailer Hitch Attaching Points
Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow
a trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow
hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the
provided attaching points on the vehicle’s frame.
Refer to the following chart to determine the
accurate attaching points. Other equipment,
such as trailer sway controls and braking equip-
ment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and
low profile mirrors, may also be required or
strongly recommended.
Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang Dimensions
Fixed, Detach and Retractable Hitch
A
1.85 ft. (565 mm)
B
2.09 ft. (636 mm)
C
2.32 ft. (707 mm)
D
2.4 ft. (733 mm)
E
1.62 ft. (494 mm)
F
1.47 ft. (447 mm)
G (Maximum Overhang)
3.59 ft. (1093 mm)
234
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models Without 4–LO Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4–LO Range
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
• Disconnect negative battery cable
Front
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
OK
OK
OK
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must
be placed in Transport Mode before tying
them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in
“Starting and Operating” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will
not run), tie-downs should be fastened
over the tires using specific straps (not to
the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set
and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing-Two Wheel
Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
235
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models
6. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the transfer case.
7. Confirm that the steering column is unlocked.
8. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
9. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and
secure it away from the battery post.
NOTE:
Disconnecting your vehicle battery will
erase radio presets and may affect other
vehicle settings. It may also trigger various
fault codes, causing MIL illumination when
the battery is reconnected.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
236
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac
II/Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in PARK
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the transfer case
selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the
ground (front or rear) will cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in
the instrument cluster.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button
twice (without pressing the brake pedal), to
turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the
engine running.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
15. Release the parking brake.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
17. Confirm that the steering column is unlocked.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
18. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and
secure it away from the negative battery
post.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
237
NOTE:
Disconnecting your vehicle battery will
erase radio presets and may affect other
vehicle settings. It may also trigger various
fault codes, causing MIL illumination when
the battery is reconnected.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any
of these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are
no longer met during the shift, then the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the
ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5. Start the engine.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine OFF.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
11. Release the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
12. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
13. Start the engine.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
4. Turn the ignition to the LOCK/OFF mode.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
9. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After
the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released,
the transfer case will shift to the position
indicated by the selector switch.
14. Press and hold the brake pedal.
15. Release the parking brake.
16. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
238
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any
of these requirements are not met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the
ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them
a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
NOTE:
Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit
models that are also equipped with an Off
Road Package, remove the lower fascia to
prevent damage. The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia
with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be
removed by hand. The front license plate
bracket must be removed first if equipped.
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
NOTE:
On Summit models the lower front fascia is
not removable.
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower fascia from the upper fascia.
Grasp the portion inside the wheel well.
Pulling it downwards and toward you, separate the tabs from the slots in the upper
fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from the
slots in the upper fascia.
239
NOTE:
Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang
from the tabs in the opposite corner as
damage to lower and upper fascia may result.
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear
of the bumper beam.
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector
from the protective connector on the bumper
beam.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE:
It is recommend to also remove the radar
sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC). This radar sensor is
specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is
not interchangeable with other radar sensors.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If
Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control
[ACC]):
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in
protective connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall
the radar sensor and bracket using the two
fasteners.
Bumper Beam
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If
Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control
[ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access to the sensor and bracket,
disconnect the wiring harness from the sensor.
NOTE:
Only models with the Off Road Package are
equipped with the a protective connector.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip
from the bracket.
5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and install on the sensor.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the
protective connector.
NOTE:
This will only work if you have a helper.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE:
It is recommended to scribe location to assist in reinstallation.
NOTE:
All cruise control functions will be disabled
when the radar sensor is disconnected.
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage
a sufficient number of tabs to support the
weight of the lower fascia (typically one or
two tabs) into the upper fascia.
240
—
—
—
—
Inside Bumper Beam
Protective Connector Location
Sensor Bracket Fasteners
Sensor Bracket
NOTE:
Some alignment may be required upon fascia installation to align sensor with fascia.
1
2
3
4
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the
radar sensor.
NOTE:
If you receive a fault, see your authorized
dealer they may need to perform a sensor
alignment.
Lower Front Fascia Installation
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs
into the slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat
Step 2 to the opposite side of the vehicle.
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
NOTE:
• It may be necessary to apply additional
force to individual tabs to make sure they
are fully engaged.
• Do not use any tools to apply additional
force to the tabs as damage to the upper
and lower fascias may result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The
vehicle height should then be raised as required
by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the optimized height
based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The
vehicle height can be changed from the default
height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If
Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result.
4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement
will cause driveline binding; use only on wet
or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering
the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up
to 20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing
small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal
performance of your vehicle’s heating and
ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode
during water fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering, as a precaution, and check
all fluids afterward. Driving through water
may cause damage that may not be covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow
for drifting.
241
Standing Water
Hill Climbing
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed
in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine
the conditions at the crest and/or on the
other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to
4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for
very steep hills.
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to assure the
fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “FourWheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
242
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion
while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to
come to a stop and immediately apply the
brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a
hill always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec-Speed
Control use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check
the wheels for impacted material. Impacted
material can cause a wheel imbalance and
freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water,
or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator,
fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and
axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
243
244
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
• BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . .
• Replacement Bulbs . . . . . .
• Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . .
• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• General Information. . . . . . .
• Underhood Fuses . . . . . . .
• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . .
• Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . .
• Preparations For Jacking . . .
• Jacking Instructions . . . . . .
• Road Tire Installation . . . . .
• Declaration Of Conformance .
• Jack Usage Precautions . . . .
• JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . .
• Preparations For Jump-Start .
• Jump-Starting Procedure . . .
• REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .
• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
• MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . .
• FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .
• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
• Without The Key Fob . . . . . .
• Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . .
• Four-Wheel Drive Models . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.247
.247
.247
.249
.251
.251
.252
.256
.256
.257
.257
.257
.260
.261
.262
.263
.263
.264
.265
.265
.265
.267
.267
.268
.268
.269
245
• ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . .269
• EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
246
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on
the switch bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue
to operate even though the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp
214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp
V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
74
247
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped
H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam)
D3S (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped
9005
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps
H11
Front Side Marker — If Equipped
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped
W5W
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped
7444NA (WY27/8W)
Rear Body Side Turn Signal Lamps
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
7440NA (WY21W)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
3157KRD LCP
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
LED - (Service at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
248
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
Front Fog Lamps
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the
key removed. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself.
If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield
and disconnect the wiring harness from the
fog lamp connector.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes
more white after approximately 10 seconds,
as the system charges.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter
turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb
from the back of the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb
with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening
on the back of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index
tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.
249
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into
the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly
into place and are fully engaged.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove
from lamp.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog
lamp connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp
housing.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from
the liftgate.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward
to disengage the lamp from the aperture
panel.
Liftgate Lower Trim
250
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counter clockwise.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED.
Service at an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your
authorized dealer for service.
General Information
FUSES
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
When a device does not work, you must check
the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
(Continued)
251
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
to the following chart.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
252
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse
Description
F03
60 Amp Yellow
–
Radiator Fan
F05
40 Amp Green
–
Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
F06
40 Amp Green
–
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07
30 Amp Pink
–
Starter Solenoid
F09
30 Amp Pink
–
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)/Brake Vacuum
Pump
F10
40 Amp Green
–
Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11
30 Amp Pink
–
Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12
40 Amp Green
–
Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13
40 Amp Green
–
Blower Motor Front
F14
40 Amp Green
–
Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse
Description
F17
30 Amp Pink
–
Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19
20 Amp Blue
–
Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20
30 Amp Pink
–
Passenger Door Module
F22
20 Amp Blue
–
Engine Control Module
F23
30 Amp Pink
–
Interior Lights #1
F24
30 Amp Pink
–
Driver Door Module
F25
30 Amp Pink
–
Front Wipers
F26
30 Amp Pink
–
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
F28
20 Amp Blue
–
Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29
20 Amp Blue
–
Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30
30 Amp Pink
–
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
F32
30 Amp Pink
–
Drive Train Control Module
F34
30 Amp Pink
–
Slip Differential Control
F35
30 Amp Pink
–
Sunroof - If Equipped
F36
30 Amp Pink
–
Rear Defroster
F37
25 Amp Clear
–
Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38
30 Amp Pink
–
Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39
30 Amp Pink
–
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40
–
10 Amp Red
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42
–
20 Amp Yellow
Horn
F44
–
10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port
F49
–
10 Amp Red
Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
253
254
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse
Description
F50
–
20 Amp Yellow
Air Suspension Control Module - If Equipped
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/Steering Column
Lock
F52
–
5 Amp Tan
Battery Sensor
F53
–
20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56
–
15 Amp Blue
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57
–
20 Amp Yellow
NOX Sensor
F58
–
15 Amp Blue
HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59
–
10 Amp Red
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60
–
15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module
F61
–
10 Amp Red
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel engine
only)
F62
–
10 Amp Red
Air Conditioning Clutch
F63
–
20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64
–
25 Amp Clear
Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66
–
10 Amp Red
Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain Sensor
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module — If Equipped
F68
–
20 Amp Yellow
Rear Wiper Motor
F69
–
15 Amp Blue
Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70
–
20 Amp Yellow
Fuel Pump Motor
F71
–
30 Amp Green
Audio Amplifier
F72
–
10 Amp Red
PCM — If Equipped
F73
–
15 Amp Blue
HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse
Description
F75
–
10 Amp Red
Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76
–
10 Amp Red
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77
–
10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78
–
10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
F80
–
10 Amp Red
Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/Anti-Intrusion
Module
F81
–
20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82
–
10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV
F83
–
10 Amp Red
Fuel Door
F84
–
15 Amp Blue
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85
–
10 Amp Red
Airbag Module
F86
–
10 Amp Red
Airbag Module
F87
–
10 Amp Red
Air Suspension — If Equipped/Trailer Tow/Steering Column Control Module
F88
–
15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91
–
20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92
–
10 Amp Red
Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93
–
20 Amp Yellow
Cigar Lighter
F94
–
10 Amp Red
Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95
–
10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/ParkSense
F96
–
10 Amp Red
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If
Equipped
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
255
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Micro Fuse
Description
F98
–
20 Amp Yellow
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99
–
10 Amp Red
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/
DSRC
F100
–
10 Amp Red
Active Damping — If Equipped
F101
–
15 Amp Blue
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams — If
Equipped
F103
–
10 Amp Red
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover
is properly positioned and fully latched.
Failure to do so may allow water to get into
the power distribution center and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
256
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a
firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or
underbody components.
Jack Storage Location
NOTE:
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located on top of the spare tire. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can
is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the
fuel filler funnel is stored in the left storage
bin under the load floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System, refer to
“Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And
Operating” in this manual.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in
the rear cargo area and is secured to the body
with a special wing nut.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer
to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information on
disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
(Continued)
257
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Jack Warning Label
258
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise
the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the
rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding). Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the
proper engagement location on the inside of
the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur
if the procedure is not properly followed.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
259
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position
and return it and the tools to the proper
positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely
store the road wheel in the cargo area.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque,
refer to Torque Specifications in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct
260
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Stowed Spare
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut
torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the
jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear
load floor cover.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug
nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
Declaration Of Conformance
1. The undersigned, Tony Fabiano, representing the manufacturer, herewith declares that
the machinery described below fulfills all
relevant provisions of:
• The EC-directive 2006/42/EC on Machinery
2. Description of machinery.
a) Generic Denomination: Vehicle Jack
b) Function: Lifting Vehicle
d) Vehicle
Model
c)
Model
Code
f) Working
Load
e) Jack
Type
Jeep®
Compass
MK
1200 kg
Max
FGMF1
Jeep
Cherokee
KL
1000 kg
Max
FGLF1
Jeep
Wrangler
JK
1000 kg
Max
FGLF2
Jeep
Grand
Cherokee
WK
1700 kg
Max
FGLF3
5. Legal Person authorized to compile the technical file:
FlexNGate – Barcelona
Avda de la Riera, 7-9
Sant Just Desvern, Barcelona, SPAIN 08960
6. References to harmonized standards: PF12074
7. Done at: Bradford, ON CANADA
8. Date: 09/30/2015
3. Manufacturers (1):
FlexNGate Seeburn, a division of Ventra
Group Co
P.O. Box 1170, 65 Industrial Road, Tottenham, ON CANADA L0G 1W0
Deutsch (German)
4. Manufacturers (2):
EG-Konformitätserklärung
FlexNGate Querétaro Ventramex, S.A. de C.V
1. Der Unterzeichner, Tony Fabiano, Vertreter
der Hersteller, erklärt hiermit, das die unten
beschriebenen Maschinen den relevanten
Bestimmungen von folgender Richtlinie entsprechen:
Av. Manantiales No. 3
Parque Industrial Bernardo Quintana, El
Marqués Querétaro C.P. 76249 – Mexico
• EG-Richtlinie 2006/42/EC für Maschinen
261
2. Beschreibung der Maschine
a) Allgemeine Bezeichnung: Scherenwagenheber
b) Funktion: Anhebung des Kraftfahrzeugs
c) Typenschlüssel
WARNING! (Continued)
Even the moving parts of the jack, the “worm
screw” (2) and joints (3) can cause injuries:
avoid contact with them. Clean it thoroughly if
dirtied with grease.
d) Modell Kommerzielle Informationen
e) Typ
f) Nutzlast
3. Hersteller (1)
4. Hersteller (2)
5. Juristische Person, die bevollmächtig ist, die
technische Datei zu erstellen
6. Bezug auf Standard Übereinstimmungen
7. Ausgestellt in
8. Datum
Jack Usage Precautions
To complete the Use and Maintenance Handbook to which this supplement is attached, given
below are some instructions on the proper use
of the jack.
WARNING!
When using the crank (1), make sure it turns
freely without the risk of scraping hands
against the ground.
(Continued)
262
CAUTION!
The jack is a tool designed exclusively for
changing a wheel, in case of a puncture or
damage to a tire of the vehicle on which it is
fitted or on vehicles of the same model. Any
other use, e.g. to jack up other vehicle models or different things, is strictly prohibited.
Never use it to carry out maintenance or
repairs under the vehicle or to change
summer/winter wheels and vice versa. Never
go under the raised vehicle. If any work under
the vehicle is necessary, contact the Fiat
Service Network. Incorrect placing of the jack
can cause the vehicle to drop: use it only in
the positions indicated. Do not use the jack
for loads higher than that specified on the
label. Never start the engine with vehicle
raised. If the vehicle is raised more than
necessary, everything can become more unstable, with the risk of the vehicle dropping
violently. Therefore raise the vehicle only as
much as necessary for the wheel/spare.
Example Jack
1 — Crank
2 — Worm Screw
3 — Joint
Maintenance
• Make sure grime does not build up on the
“worm screw”
• Keep the “worm screw” lubricated
• Never modify the jack.
Conditions Of Non-Use:
• temperatures below −40°C
• on sandy or muddy ground
• on uneven ground
• on steep roads
• in extreme weather conditions: thunderstorms, typhoons, hurricanes, blizzards,
storms, etc.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, or either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump-started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger’s front seat. There are remote terminals located under the hood to assist in jumpstarting.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition
to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive.
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the
cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
263
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
(Continued)
264
CAUTION! (Continued)
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located in the spare tire storage area. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is
needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and
proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel
System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating” in this manual.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it
off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the
A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to
floor and the blower control to high. This
allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
CAUTION! (Continued)
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake, before activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the
vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as
a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
(Continued)
265
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
strap until the lever clicks and latches in the
released position. The transmission is now
out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
Release Latch
Released Position
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed
properly and locks into position.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the
Manual Park Release mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
Release Latch
4. While the metal latch is in the open position,
simultaneously pull upwards on the tether
266
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension upward while pushing the release
latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it
back in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ⴖESC Offⴖ switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
ⴖESC Offⴖ switch again to restore ⴖESC Onⴖ
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/
h), or drivetrain damage may result.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described under “Recreational Towing” in the
“Starting and Operating” section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. Refer to the section on Quadra-Lift for
more information. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure
to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
(Continued)
267
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under
“Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
• Ignition in ACC or ON/RUN mode (or disconnect
negative battery cable)
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to
“Manual Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
268
2WD Models
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode, not in the LOCK/OFF
mode.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode.
The only approved method of towing without the
key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using
a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the
front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering
wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and
the front wheels on the ground.
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a twospeed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL position, and therefore
must be towed with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
269
270
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
• Scheduled Servicing — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
• Scheduled Servicing — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
• 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
• 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
• 3.0L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
• Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
• Checking Oil Level — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
• DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
• Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
• Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
• Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . .293
• Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel Engine . . . . .293
• Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel — Diesel Engine . . . . . .294
• Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Message Process Flow (Diesel
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid/AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
271
•
•
•
•
•
272
• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .
• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
• Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . .
TIRES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tires — General Information . . . . . .
• Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . .
• Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . .
• Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . .
• Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . .
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . .
BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Protection From Atmospheric Agents .
• Body And Underbody Maintenance . .
• Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . .
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Seats And Fabric Parts. . . . . . . . . .
• Plastic And Coated Parts . . . . . . . .
• Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.300
.303
.304
.304
.305
.305
.305
.305
.309
.310
.311
.312
.313
.313
.314
.314
.315
.315
.315
.315
.316
.316
.317
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Scheduled Servicing — Gasoline
Engine
The scheduled services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the
best vehicle performance and reliability. More
frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
In the instrument cluster an “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
The oil change indicator message will illuminate
approximately 7,000 miles (11,200 km) after the
most recent oil change was performed. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within 500 miles (800 km).
NOTE:
Once a Month
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicles oil if it has been
12 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear.
• Change your engine oil more often if you
drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) or 12 months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under ”Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder; add fluid as
needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at
or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
273
150,000
240
Change engine oil and oil
filter. ††
Rotate tires
If using your vehicle for any
of the following: Dusty or
off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings,
replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect CV Joints.
Visually inspect condition of:
exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and
hoses (exhaust - fuel system
- brakes), rubber elements
(boots, sleeves, bushings,
etc.)
274
240,000
142,500
228
228,000
135,000
216
216,000
127,500
204
204,000
120,000
192
192,000
112,500
180
180,000
105,000
168
168,000
97,500
156
156,000
90,000
144
144,000
82,500
132
132,000
75,000
120
120,000
67,500
108
108,000
60,000
96
96,000
52,500
84
84,000
45,000
72
72,000
37,500
60
60,000
30,000
48
48,000
22,500
36
36,000
15,000
24
24,000
Or Months: 12
Kilometers or time passed
(whichever comes first):
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
12,000
7,500
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 12
Kilometers or time passed
(whichever comes first):
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
132
144
156
168
180
192
204
216
228
240
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
Inspect the front suspension,
tie rod ends and boot seals,
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear
axle fluid, change if using
your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, offroad or frequent
trailer towing.
Change brake fluid every
24 months if using DOT
4 brake fluid.**
Replace the air conditioning
filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with fourwheel disc brakes.
Replace engine air cleaner
filter.
Replace spark plugs *
Replace accessory drive
belt(s).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
275
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 12
Kilometers or time passed
(whichever comes first):
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
132
144
156
168
180
192
204
216
228
240
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months
or 240,000 km whichever
comes first.
Inspect or change the transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change Transfer Case Fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV
valve if necessary.†
* The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
** DOT 4 brake fluid is time based only; mileage
intervals do not apply.
† This maintenance is recommended by the
manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to
maintain emissions warranty.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
(Continued)
276
X
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Severe Duty Conditions
†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at
every 4500 miles (7,500 km) or 12 months if
using your vehicle under any of the following
severe duty conditions:
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Stop and go driving.
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
housing when the new filter is installed if the
residual oil is not either removed from the housing or enough time has not elapsed to allow the
oil to drain back into the engine. When servicing
the oil filter on this engine, carefully remove the
filter and use a suction gun to remove any
residual oil left in the housing or wait about
30 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
engine.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial
service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
Scheduled Servicing — Diesel
Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled servicing.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent shorttrips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
To help you have the best driving experience
possible, the manufacturer has identified the
specific vehicle maintenance service intervals
that are required to keep your vehicle operating
properly and safely.
The manufacturer recommends that these
maintenance intervals be performed at your
selling dealer. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access to
factory trained information, genuine MOPAR
parts, and specially designed electronic and
mechanical tools that can help prevent future
costly repairs.
The maintenance intervals shown should be
performed as indicated in this section.
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 12,500 miles
(20,000 km) or 12 months, whichever
comes first.
• Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at
or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder; add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
277
• Completely fill the AdBlue Fluid tank.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel
filter/water separator unit.
150,000
132
144
Change engine oil and oil filter.
Completely fill the AdBlue tank.
Rotate tires
If using your vehicle for any of the following:
Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect CV Joints
278
240,000
137,500
120
220,00
125,000
108
200,00
112,500
96
180,000
100,000
84
160,000
87,500
72
140,000
75,000
60
120,000
62,500
48
100,000
50,000
36
80,000
37,500
24
60,000
25,000
12
40,000
Or Months:
Kilometers:
20,000
Miles or time passed (whichever comes
first):
12,500
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(*)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Miles or time passed (whichever comes
first):
12,500
25,000
37,500
50,000
62,500
75,000
87,500
100,000
112,500
125,000
137,500
150,000
Or Months:
Kilometers:
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
132
144
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
100,000
120,000
140,000
160,000
180,000
200,00
220,00
240,000
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and
hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings,
etc.)
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Change brake fluid every 24 months if using
DOT 4 brake fluid. (**)
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
offroad or frequent trailer towing.
Replace the fuel filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
279
Miles or time passed (whichever comes
first):
12,500
25,000
37,500
50,000
62,500
75,000
87,500
100,000
112,500
125,000
137,500
150,000
Or Months:
Kilometers:
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
132
144
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
100,000
120,000
140,000
160,000
180,000
200,00
220,00
240,000
Inspect or change the transfer case fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid
(*) The actual interval for changing engine oil
and replacing the engine oil filter depends on
the vehicle usage conditions, and is signalled by
the warning light or message in the instrument
panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/20,000
km. If the car is used mainly for urban driving, or
fuel that is not strictly compliant with European
Specifications EN590 is used, it is advisable to
change the oil and replace the filter every year.
(**) The brake fluid change interval is time based
only, mileage intervals do not apply.
280
X
X
X
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
X
X
X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Filter Access
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
281
5.7L Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
282
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
3.0L Diesel Engine
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Reservoir
— Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
283
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline
Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the
correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
ating the engine, first ensure the engine is at full
operating temperature, then wait for five minutes after engine shutdown to check the oil.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within the
SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of
the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — Diesel Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the
correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals. The best time to check the oil level is
before starting the engine after it has been
parked overnight. When checking oil after oper-
284
Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
NOTE:
It is possible for your oil level to be slightly
higher than a previous check. This would be
due to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in
the crankcase due to operation of the diesel
particulate filter regeneration strategy. This
fuel will evaporate out under normal operation.
1 — MAX Mark
Never operate the engine with oil level below the
“MIN” mark or above the upper “MAX” mark.
2 — MIN Mark
Adding Washer Fluid
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Add oil only when the level on the
dipstick is below the “MIN” mark. The total
capacity from the MIN mark to the MAX mark is
1.7 qts (1.6L).
The instrument cluster display will indicate when
the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor
detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light
on the vehicle graphic outline and the
“WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment,
be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When re-
filling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a
solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the
temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised when
filling or working around the washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner.
Service Manuals are available which include
detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
285
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Diesel Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that
meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-10902, and that are ACEA E9/E7 or
A3/B4 certified and meet the requirements of
FCA LLC.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
This
symbol
means that the oil
has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute
(API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommend engine oils that
are API certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395, FCA 9.55535CR1 or ACEA A1/B1 .
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine
oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil
286
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 0W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For
information on engine oil filler cap location, refer
to “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section for further information.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location, refer
to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this
section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must
use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may
result in improper operation of the Fuel
Saver Technology.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.0L Diesel Engine
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
technology Diesel Engine and an emission
device designed to limit Diesel Particulate
Emissions from being released into the atmosphere. The durability of your engine and life
expectancy of this diesel particulate filter
emission device is highly dependent on the
use of the correct engine oil.
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as MOPAR that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the ACEA E9/E7 or
A3/B4 engine oil category is required.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location, refer
to “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
287
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner
cover.
Air Cleaner Filter
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or
debris is present before replacing the air
filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing
assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner
cover to the housing assembly.
288
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner
cover.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Spring Clips
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Cover
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or
debris is present before replacing the air
filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing
assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner
cover to the housing assembly.
289
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
290
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low globalwarming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C
Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment
door from its hinges, there will be some
resistance.
gage the mid way snap by pulling the door
outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
side to fully remove the cover.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door and
lifting the clip out of glove compartment door.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on
both sides of the glove compartment door,
partially close the glove compartment door
and push inward to release the glove compartment travel stop on one side and repeat
this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to
disengage the glove compartment door from
its hinges.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that secures
the filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disen-
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining
tabs fully engage the cover.
291
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the
glove compartment door hinge and reattach
the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face
of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges
and glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
292
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan
is temperature controlled and can start at
any time regardless of ignition mode. You
could be injured by the moving fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are
not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used
fluids from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station, or government
agency for advice on recycling programs
and for where used fluids and filters can be
properly disposed of in your area.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter
— Diesel Engine
The fuel filter/water separator housing is located
on the left side of the vehicle in front of the fuel
tank. The best access to this water drain valve is
from under the vehicle.
Fuel Filter Assembly
1 — Fuel Filter Access
2 — Water in Fuel Drain
CAUTION!
• Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the
filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the
filter housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/
water; allow the accumulated water to drain.
Leave the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. When clear
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it
clockwise.
If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running, or while the ignition switch
is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” will illuminate and an audible chime will be
heard. At this point you should stop the engine
and drain the water from the filter housing.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter
assembly, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the water was drained while the engine
was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
may remain on for approximately three minutes.
If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel
have been drained, follow the directions for
“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer’s filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability.
CAUTION!
• Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
(Continued)
293
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to install the filter
dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime
the fuel system.
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any
accumulated water and fuel drain.
12. After engine start, verify the filters do not
leak.
4. Close the water drain valve.
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel — Diesel Engine
5. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing
to prevent contamination from entering fuel
system during service.
6. Remove using a socket. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
7. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
8. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
Fuel Filter Assembly
1 — Fuel Filter Access
2 — Water in Fuel Drain
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
294
CAUTION!
Take care when handling the new fuel filter to
prevent contamination from entering the fuel
system.
9. Lubricate o-ring on new filter with clean engine oil.
10. Install the cartridge into the housing with
clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 to service second fuel filter in assembly.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot
on brake to put vehicle in Run position. This
will activate the in tank fuel pump for approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this process
twice.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approximately 30 seconds at a time. Allow two
minutes between cranking intervals.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is
forced from all the fuel lines.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.
NOTE:
• Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20%
can negatively impact the fuel filter’s ability to separate water from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion
or damage.
• In addition, commercially available fuel
additives are not necessary for the proper
operation of your diesel engine.
• For extreme cold conditions, ⴖMopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatmentⴖ is recommended to assist with cold starting.
Intervention Regeneration Strategy
— Message Process Flow (Diesel
Engine)
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system.
These systems are seamlessly integrated into
your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s
catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your
part.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid/AdBlue
Adblue sometimes known simply by the name of
its active component, UREA—is a key component of selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent
emission regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing
agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the
presence of a catalyst to convert smog-forming
nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen
and water vapor.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
you to additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors
and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
Body Lubrication
295
operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove
dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and
grease should be removed. Particular attention
should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
296
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or
blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked
Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked
Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm
with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing
up and away from the windshield.
297
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off
the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your right hand.
With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you
pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm
past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the
end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
298
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off
the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and
prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
299
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition, when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan
motor lead before working near the radiator
cooling fan.
(Continued)
300
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle
is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn
the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be
added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a nonOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility
to maintain the proper level of protection against
freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please
contact your local authorized dealer.
301
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill
with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not
loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
(Continued)
302
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by
a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine
coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few
miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the
engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and
being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance
Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full
mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake
master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake
fluid is abnormally low, check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir
cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a
open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
(Continued)
303
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial
or complete brake failure. This could result
in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
304
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
Transfer Case
RAISING THE VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
TIRES
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten.
You could damage them and cause them to
leak.
• Ride Comfort
305
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
306
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable
steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side
may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING! (Continued)
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
(Continued)
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A
Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
307
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch
(1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph
on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information placard or
the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle maintenance schedule is
highly recommended.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
(Continued)
308
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,
and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven
in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped
with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on
the tire sidewall.
309
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
310
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
311
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE:
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain
strong acids or strong alkaline additives that
can harm the wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. These products and
automatic car washes may damage the
wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not
use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin
312
Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel’s
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes
when stopping will reduce the risk of brake
rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this
finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all
that is required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-tobody clearance. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, use reduced size
snow chains or traction devices with a maximum projection of 12 mm beyond the tire
profile on P265/60R18 109T, 265/
60R18 110H, 265/50R20 107V, 265/
50R20XL 111V tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System
will automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearwardcross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
STORING THE VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
Tire Rotation
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more
than a month, observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
313
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the
battery post and be sure that the battery is
fully charged. During storage check battery
charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge
every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the
tire placard and check it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary
for two weeks or more, run idle the engine for
approximately five minutes, with the air con-
314
ditioning system on and high fan speed. This
will ensure a proper lubrication of the system,
thus minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the vehicle is put back
into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park
Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative
terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute
with ignition switch in the OFF position and
close the driver’s door. When reconnecting
the positive and negative terminals to the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric
Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive
to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect
on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your
vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk
be kept clear and open.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
315
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Leather Parts
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers
to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent
damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid
scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
316
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it
tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and
fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends MOPAR total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to
clean the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
317
318
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . .
• BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .
• Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES
• 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . .
• CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . .
• Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE . . . .
• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.320
.320
.320
.320
.321
.321
.321
.322
.322
.322
.322
.322
.322
.323
.323
.324
.325
.325
.326
319
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on a plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield. This number
also is stamped into the right front body, behind
the right front seat. Move the right front seat
forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a
convenient record of your vehicle identification
number and optional equipment.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
VIN Location
320
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However,
the effort required to brake the vehicle will be
much greater than that required with the power
system operating.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176
N·m)
M14 x
1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any
dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you
experience these problems, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINES
3.6L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using highquality unleaded gasoline with a minimum Research Octane Number (RON) of 91.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not
harmful to your engine. However, continued
heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause
damage, and immediate service is required.
Theses engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using highquality unleaded gasoline having an Research
Octane Number (RON) of 91 to 95. The manufacturer recommends the use of a 95 Research
Octane Number for optimum performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not
harmful to your engine. However, continued
heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause
damage, and immediate service is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
321
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you
experience these problems, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Methanol
(Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrations
when blended with unleaded gasoline. You may
find fuels containing 3% or more methanol along
with other alcohols called cosolvents. Problems
that result from using methanol/gasoline are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer. While
MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
WARNING!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol.
Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage
critical fuel system components.
322
Ethanol
The manufacturer recommends that your vehicle be operated on fuel containing no more
than 15% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a
reputable supplier may reduce the risk of exceeding this 15% limit and/or of receiving fuel
with abnormal properties. It should also be
noted that an increase in fuel consumption
should be expected when using ethanolblended fuels, due to the lower energy content
of ethanol. Problems that result from using
methanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
CAUTION!
Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than
15% may result in engine malfunction, starting and operating difficulties, and materials
degradation. These adverse effects could
result in permanent damage to your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to
reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force
fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS –
DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American Society for Testing
and Materials) specification D-975 Grade
S15 will provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or
-7°C), or is required to operate at colder-thannormal conditions for prolonged periods, use
climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No.
2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will
provide better protection from fuel gelling or
wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle
must only use premium diesel fuel that
meets the requirements of EN 590. Biodiesel
blends up to 7% that meet EN 590 may also
be used.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
using the fuel/water separator drain provided on
the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality
fuel and follow the cold weather advice above,
fuel conditioners should not be required in your
vehicle. If available in your area, a high cetane
“premium” diesel fuel may offer improved coldstarting and warm-up performance.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/
Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
323
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
AdBlue Fluid Tank
24.6 Gallons
93 Liters
8 Gallons
30.3 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, ACEA A3/B4 or API CJ-4/SM)
8 Quarts
7.7 Liters
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10-Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10-Year/150,000 Mile Formula) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10-Year/150,000 Mile Formula) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10-Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
12 Quarts
11.4 Liters
Cooling System *
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
324
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 or an
equivalent coolant.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 or FCA 9.55535-CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 or FCA 9.55535-CR1. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as MOPAR that meets FCA Material
Standard MS-10902 or FCA 9.55535-D3 and the ACEA A3/B4 or API CJ-4/SM engine oil category
is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Minimum 91 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Minimum 91 Octane Acceptable - 95 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection – 3.0L Diesel Engine
50 Cetane or higher (Less than 10 ppm Sulfur)
AdBlue
MOPAR Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the
ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
325
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I)
We recommend you use MOPAR NV 247/245 Transfer Case Lubricant.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II)
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4 product.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5).
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5).
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use MOPAR Brake & Clutch Fluid DOT 4, that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90039.
DOT 4 Brake fluid must be replaced every 24 months regardless of mileage.
326
10
MULTIMEDIA
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0 Personal
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . .
OFF ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Off Road Pages Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Drivetrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Pitch And Roll — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Accessory Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Blu-ray Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Play Video Games. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.329
.329
.329
.330
.330
.330
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.330
.346
.362
.363
.363
.363
.364
.364
.364
.365
.365
.365
.366
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.366
.366
.367
.367
.368
327
• Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio
• Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System . . . . .
• Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If Equipped . . .
• Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty .
• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . .
• UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . .
• Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Voice Text Reply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.368
.369
.370
.371
.371
.371
.371
.374
.374
.374
.375
.375
.376
.376
.377
.377
.378
.379
.379
.380
.380
.381
UCONNECT RADIOS
CYBERSECURITY
For detailed information about your Uconnect
radio, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
screen.
” button to open the App
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss
of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact
you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security
and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/
software-update to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
329
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs,
CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control
knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel that allow you to access and change the
customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Your Uconnect system may also have screen off
and back buttons located below the Uconnect
system.
Push the screen off button to turn off the
Uconnect touchscreen. Push the screen off button a second time to turn the touchscreen on.
Push the back button to exit out of a menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on
the Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On Faceplate
And Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
330
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Set-
tings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is complete, either press the
Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the “Up” or “Down” Arrow buttons on
the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
Setting Name
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the
ignition in the RUN position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Selectable Options
Display Mode
Manual
Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
+
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
+
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" positions.
331
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (Brasileiro/Deutsch/English/Español/Français/Italiano/
Nederlands/Polski/Português/Türk/Pусский/Arabic) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the
screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
US
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km,
or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measure independently.
332
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Voice Response Length
Brief
Show Command List
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
Selectable Options
12 hour
24 hour
AM
PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Set Date
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
333
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.
Front ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
Rear ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “ParkSense Rear Volume” button on the touchscreen, indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to help stop the
vehicle (only enabled when ParkSense is also on).
LaneSense Sensitivity
Early
Medium
Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Sensitivity” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
334
Setting Name
LaneSense Strength
Selectable Options
Low
Medium
High
Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
— If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK or the ignition is in the OFF position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay, push the “+ MORE” button on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Paddle Shifters
Enable
Disable
335
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning On/
Off — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is defaulted to ON from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will reset to ON when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Sensitivity —
If Equipped
Far
Med
Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be
at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you
the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning-Plus
(FCW+) Active Braking — If
Equipped
Off
On
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be
at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you
the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
336
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut
off.
Headlights With Wipers
— If Equipped
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beam — If
Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights
On
Off
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
337
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door
All Doors
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the ) key fob unlock button, you must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection,
press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”
338
Setting Name
Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If
Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
Off
Remote Start
All Start
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated Seats”
button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All Starts.
339
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Engine Off Power Delay
— If Equipped
Selectable Options
0 sec
45 sec
5 min
10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut
off.
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
340
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
NOTE:
Before compass calibration is performed,
the compass variance zone should be set for
best results.
Setting Name
Compass Variance
Selectable Options
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to 15 per the compass variance
zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for
the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most accurate compass headings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
Compass Calibration
Start
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen
and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when
the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module
is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
341
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Adjustable Options
Equalizer
Bass
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide
your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center “C” Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
Loudness — If Equipped
Yes
No
-3
+3
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input
342
3
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Paired Phones
List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Display Phone Info In Cluster
Off
On
Suspension
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to
park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages
All
Warnings Only
NOTE:
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages, or
to only display suspension warnings.
343
Setting Name
Tire Jack Mode
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is
on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service.
Radio Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “Radio Setup” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Regional — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Regional” feature is selected, it forces regional service-following enabling automatic switching to network stations.
344
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
345
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
System Information
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect 8.4 Settings
Bluetooth, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such
as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
NOTE:
346
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the “Back” Arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Display Mode
Manual
Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
+
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
+
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the "Set Theme" button
on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (Brasileiro/Deutsch/English/Español/Français/Italiano/
Nederlands/Polski/Português/Türk/Pусский/Arabic) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
the language, showing that setting has been selected.
347
Setting Name
Keyboard
Selectable Options
Smart Keyboard Selection
Latin Keyboard
NOTE:
Latin Keyboard displays different keyboard layouts to choose from. The selectable keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard, QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Nav Next Turn Pop-up in Cluster
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
348
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Units
US
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km,
or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Voice Response Length
Brief
Show Command List
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours
+
-
349
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is defaulted to ON from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will reset to ON when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped
Far
Med
Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be
at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you
the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
350
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning Active Braking — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
LaneSense Sensitivity
Early
Medium
Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Sensitivity” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength
Low
Medium
High
Power Steering
Sport
Normal
Comfort
NOTE:
The “Steering Feel Options” setting will allow you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering
effort. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is
less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be
enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
Rear ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
351
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Tilt Side Mirrors in
Reverse
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors — If
Equipped
Paddle Shifters
Enable
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Off
Disable
Lights
Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not
damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned
will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
352
Setting Name
Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut
off.
353
Setting Name
Headlight Illuminated On
Approach
Selectable Options
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
Headlights With Wipers
— If Equipped
Auto Dim High Beams—
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Steering Directed Headlights — If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make your selection, press the “Steering Directed Headlights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Daytime Running Lights
— If Equipped
Flash Lights With Lock
Headlight Dip — If
Equipped
NOTE:
Select this feature when driving on the opposite side of road to lower headlights. To make your selection, press the “Headlight Dip” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
354
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door
All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When "All Doors" is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all
doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will
unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
355
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio
station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort ” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
Off
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON.
356
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec
45 sec
5 min
10 min
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to
park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages
All
Warings
NOTE:
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages, or
to only display suspension warnings.
357
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Tire Jack Mode
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is
on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service.
358
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Balance/Fade
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box.
Equalizer
Bass
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide
your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is connected.
359
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Paired Phone And Audio Sources
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones or and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Display Phone Info In Cluster
Off
On
Radio Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “Radio Setup” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Regional — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Regional” feature is selected, it forces regional service-following enabling automatic switching to network stations.
360
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
361
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
System Information
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
Off Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
OFF ROAD PAGES — IF
EQUIPPED
• Drivetrain
Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while operating on off road conditions. It supplies information
relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of
the transfer case, the pitch and roll of the vehicle
(if equipped), and the active Selec-Terrain
mode.
• Suspension
• Pitch and Roll — If Equipped
• Accessory Gauge
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, and then select “Off
Road Pages”.
1 — Off Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
362
Off Road Pages Status Bar
The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off Road Pages and is present in
each of the five selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for the
following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD LOW)
• Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
• Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only when in 4WD
LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Status and Set
Speed
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
Drivetrain
The following information is displayed:
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
• Suspension Articulation Indicator
The following information is displayed:
• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer case
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Suspension
The Suspension page displays information concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
• Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
• Normal
• Off Road 1
• Off Road 2
• Entry/Exit
• Aero
363
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by
a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation
Indicator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride
Height indicator on the screen will switch to
the appropriate height and the Suspension
Articulation Indicator will show the movement and change in height.
Pitch And Roll — If Equipped
The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle
side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
1
2
3
4
5
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
364
Accessory Gauges
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature,
Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles
Only), Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
—
—
—
—
—
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must
be in the ON/RUN position to display SelecTerrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
• Snow
• Sand
• Auto — Default
• Mud
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel Drive
Low
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next
listenable station.
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off
Road Pages Status Bar will also display the
current Selec-Terrain mode.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
365
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB
device to be plugged into the USB port.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front
seats: Open the LCD screen cover by lifting
up on cover.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G
iPod and iPhone devices. Some iPod software
versions may not fully support the iPod control
features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray
Discs, listen to audio over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of standard
video games or audio devices.
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become
familiar with its features and operation.
366
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
RSE System Screen
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel
1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and headphones, refers to Screen 1 (driver’s side) and
Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote Control
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side).
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray
Disc Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc
player, the icon will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
RSE System Remote Control Channel
Selectors
and then press the “Disc” button. Press
the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen
is not available in all states/provinces. The
vehicle must be stopped, and the gear
selector must be in the PARK position for
vehicles with automatic transmission.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
• The system can be controlled by the front
seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player
with the label facing as indicated on the
Blu-ray player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the
first track.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to
operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center
console.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear passengers, ensure the Remote
Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Rear 2.
NOTE:
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user. If this button is not
highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press
the “Media” button on the touchscreen,
367
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition
cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear
headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
2/Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user. If this button is not
highlighted, select button to access controls for
Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the rear media button on the
touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s
side rear screen), and then press the source
key, and using the up and down arrows,
highlight disc from the menu and press the
OK button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side
of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI
Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the
monitor to display video directly from a video
camera, connect video games for display on the
screen, or play music directly from an
MP3 player.
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, ensure to follow the standard
color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle’s
Power Inverter.
Select this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio
7. Cabin Audio Mode
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label
facing as indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc
player. The radio automatically selects the
appropriate mode after the disc is recognized
and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track.
Select this button to change the cabin audio to
the rear entertainment source currently shown
on the rear media control screen.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for the
active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the
rear media control screen.
368
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1
(driver’s side rear passenger), ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone channel
selector switch is on Rear 1.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the
Rear Media Control screen.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2
(passenger’s side rear passenger), ensure
the Remote Control and Headphone channel
selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push ENTER/OK.
NOTE:
Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD
or Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the
basic remote control functions for DVD play
such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF,
RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn OFF the remote control
screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video
Screen System
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen,
and the select source button on the touchscreen. Press the DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To exit, press
the X at the top right of the screen.
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able
to transmit two channels of stereo audio and
video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs
and Blu-ray Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video
source will display on Rear 1 and can be
heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video
source will display on Rear 2 and can be
heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones
even when the screen(s) are closed.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat
Entertainment Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect
radio touchscreen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
369
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control
— If Equipped
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off. To hear audio while the
screen is closed, push the Power button to
turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is pushed, the currently affected channel
or channel button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection
screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates
which channel is being controlled by the
remote control. When the selector switch is
in the Rear 1 position, the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 1
(left screen). When the selector switch is in
the Rear 2 position, the remote controls the
functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right
screen).
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return
to source selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option
in a menu.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video
chapter.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access
Blu-ray Disc features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat
and shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc popup
menu, the DVD title menu, or to access disc
menus.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or
titles.
12. ■ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
370
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind
through the current audio track or video
chapter.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on, the
channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged
batteries are installed in the headphones.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on
before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video
system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen
selector switch is in the same position as the
headphone selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 1, the Remote is controlling
Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 1.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
• When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 2, the Remote is controlling
Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote
control.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to
the next mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote
control to navigate to the available modes
and push the OK button to select the new
mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu,
push the BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you"
or "your") of this particular Unwired Technology
LLC ("Unwired") wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.
371
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse or modification
of the Product other than by Unwired. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT
LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES
TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR
DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option,
will repair or replace any defective Product.
Unwired reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model.
THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IM-
372
PLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones, please
phone
1-888-293-3332
or
email
customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s POP UP/MENU
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
Video, etc.), pushing the remote control’s
SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of
the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so
there is no need to change these settings under
normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item,
then push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for the currently
selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and push the remote control’s
ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc
player’s settings of DVD being watched in the
remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with
the screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
• Close the video screen.
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or
DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux
• To change the current audio mode, push the
remote control’s SOURCE button. This will
automatically select the next available audio
mode without using the Mode/Source Select
menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the ON indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel.
If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged
batteries are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing
the following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter
discs:
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC,
AVCHD, DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3
– 6) profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs
are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play. If
the region code for the DVD disc does not match
the region code for the player, the disc will not
play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Bluray Disc player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc
is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also
have a Video title, but the Video title is ignored).
All multi-channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may
result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you
increase the volume level to account for this
change in level, remember to lower the volume
before changing the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and
CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or
Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing
MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play
DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed
or recorded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray Disc
player may not be able to play some or the
entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible
format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following
guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is
unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF,
HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of
512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and
CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with
the disc recording software publisher for more
information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a
permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels
as they may separate from the disc, become
stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc
(usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
".mp3" or ".MP3" and WMA files must always
end with the extension ".wma" or ".WMA". To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
373
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data
(such as artist name, track title, album, etc.)
are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next
available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC,
MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not
play. The Blu-ray player will automatically
skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between
96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed
bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and
192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote
control’s or Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to
advance to the next file, or the 䉲 button to
return to the start of the current or previous
file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
374
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray Disc player will attempt to
continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to
play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F
(48.9° C). When this occurs, the player will
display "High Temp" and will shut off the Rear
Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect
the optics of the Blu-ray Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home
or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
RADIO OPERATION AND
MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition
may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the
mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4 NAV system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Uconnect 5.0
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
current category.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For 8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say…
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
375
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM or FM
radio stations you would like to hear.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say…
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button
and say “Help.” The system will
provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Uconnect 5.0
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
. After the beep, say one
Push the VR button
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest
Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
376
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your AUX or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com
for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say
Push the Phone button
one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
• Dial123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts
• Redial (call
number)
Uconnect 5.0 Media
previous
outgoing
phone
• Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
and say “Call,” then prothe Phone button
nounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text mesand say Lissages. Push the Phone button
ten. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
377
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
. After the
you, push the Phone button
beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4
simple steps:
Stuck in
traffic.
See you
later.
No.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
Call me.
Are you
there yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need directions.
I’m on my
way.
I’m lost.
Can’t talk
right now.
iPhone Notification Settings
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
378
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri
Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text
message.
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures
hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is
equipped with climate control.)
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to
go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect
8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter
state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say:
“Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee
shop.”
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and will respond
back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Siri Enable Screens
1 — Select Settings on
your iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
379
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles
sound system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead to ensure
your command is understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can been seen
on the touchscreen while typing a custom
message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
1 — Phone Pick up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE:
button will start
A push and release of the
normal embedded VR functions. The push
button will
and hold, then release of the
start Siri functions.
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
380
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
Siri Eyes Free
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you
to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the
wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter
display to keep track of your missed calls and
text messages while you were using Do Not
Disturb.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA
US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching
the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a
soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid
scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures
may become too high.
NOTE:
If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g.,
scratched, reflective coating removed, a
hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player
service.
381
382
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . .
• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN
• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BOLIVIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHINA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COLOMBIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . . .
• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . .
• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EL SALVADOR . . . . . . . . . . .
• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.385
.386
.386
.386
.387
.387
.387
.388
.388
.388
.389
.389
.389
.390
.390
.390
.391
.391
.391
.392
.392
.392
.393
.393
.393
.394
383
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
384
HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUXEMBURG . . . . . . . . . . .
NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . .
NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . .
NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAGUAY. . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PORTUGAL. . . . . . . . . . . . .
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
REUNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROMANIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERBIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLOVAKIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOUTH AFRICA . . . . . . . . . .
SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . .
TAIWAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . .
URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
ISLANDS
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.394
.394
.395
.395
.395
.396
.396
.396
.397
.397
.397
.398
.398
.398
.399
.399
.399
.400
.400
.400
.401
.401
.401
.402
.402
.402
.403
.403
.403
.404
.404
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
When you contact the distributor please provide
all of the following information:
The manufacturer distributors are vitally interested in your satisfaction with their products and
services. If a servicing problem or other difficulty
should occur, we recommend that you take the
following steps:
• Your name, address and phone number.
Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer
with the dealer principal or the service manager.
Management personnel at the authorized dealer
are in the best position to resolve the problem.
• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digit
number is found on a label, located on the left
front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. It is also available
from your vehicle registration or title).
• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.
• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer
distance.
• Service history of your vehicle.
• An accurate description of the problem and
the conditions under which it occurs.
385
ARGENTINA
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
Chrysler Argentina S.A
FCA Australia Pty. Ltd.
Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435
ABN 23 125 956 505
C1107CII
PO Box 23267, Docklands Victoria 3008
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Ph. 1300 133 079
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 20 1741
International Toll Number
Tel: + 39 02 444 12 045
Tel: +54-11-4891 7900
Fax: +54-11-4891 7901
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 201745
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 201747
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
386
BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN
BELGIUM
BOLIVIA
Interamericana Trading Corporation
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 55 888
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Ovando & Cia S.A.
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 18 142
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Fax: (591-3) 334 0229
Warrens, St. Michael
Barbados, West Indies
BB22026, PO Box 98
Tel.: 246–417–8000
Fax: 246–425–2888
Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y Canal
Isuto
Santa Cruz, Bolivia
PO Box 6852
Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 16 166
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
387
BRAZIL
BULGARIA
CHILE
Chrysler do Brasil
BALKAN STAR
Comercial Chrysler S.A.
Rua Funchal, 418 - 16º andar CJ 1601/1602,
Vila Olímpia
Resbarska Str. 5
Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura
1510 Sofia
Santiago, Chile
04551-060 Sao Paulo – S.P., Brazil
Tel.: 359 2 91988
Zip Code 101931-7, 367-V
Tel: +5511 4949 3900
Fax: 359 2 945 40 14
Tel.: +562 837 1300
Fax: +5511 4949 3905
Fax: +562 6039196
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
388
CHINA
COLOMBIA
COSTA RICA
Chrysler Group (China) Sales Limited
Chrysler Colombia S.A.
AutoStar
No. 1509, Building# 63, Dongsanhuan Middle
Road
Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25
La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional
Zip Code 110931
San José, Costa Rica
Beijing
Bogotá Colombia
PO Box 705-1150
PR. China
Tel: +57 1 745 5777
Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000
Zip Code: 100022
Fax: +57 1 410 5667
Fax: (506) 295 - 0052
Tel: 400-650-0118 Ext. 2
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
389
CROATIA
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
Autocommerce Hrvatska d.o.o.
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 200 233
International Toll Number
Tel: +420 800 200 233
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 80 20 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Jablanska 80
10 000 Zagreb
Tel: 00 385 1 3869 001
Fax: 00 385 1 3869 069
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 200 233
International Toll Number
Tel: +420 800 200 233
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 200 233
International Toll Number
Tel: +420 800 200 233
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 80 20 30 35
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 80 20 30 36
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
390
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
Reid y Compañia
Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador
Grupo Q del Salvador
John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega
Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5
Ave. Las Amapolas (Autopista Sur)
Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic
Guayaquil, Ecuador
Tel.: (809) 562–7211
Tel.: +593 4 2244101
Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas de
San Francisco,
Fax: (809) 565-8774
Fax: +593 4 2244273
San Salvador, El Salvador
Zip Code 152
Tel.: +503 2248 6400
Fax: +503 278 5731
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
391
ESTONIA
FINLAND
FRANCE
Silberauto AS
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 0 42653
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Järvevana tee 11
11314 Tallinn
Tel.: +372 53337946
Tel.: 06 266 072
Fax: 06 266 066
service@silberauto.ee
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 169216
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 363430
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
392
GERMANY
GREECE
GUATEMALA
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 0426533
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas
Grupo Q del Guatemala
240-242 Kifisias Avenue
15231 Halandri Athens, Greece
Km 16 carretera a El Salvador, condado concepción
Tel.: +30 210 6700800
Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala
Fax: +30 210 6700820
Zip Code 1004
Tel.: +502 6685 9500
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 1692 169
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 3634 300
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
393
HONDURAS
HUNGARY
IRELAND
Grupo Q de Honduras
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 80 10 10 80
International Toll Number
Tel: +36 80 10 10 80
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 1800 505337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores,
Tegucigalpa, Honduras
Tel.: +504 2290 3700
Fax: +504 2232 6564
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 82 10 10 80
International Toll Number
Tel: +36 80 10 10 80
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 81 10 10 80
International Toll Number
Tel: +36 80 10 10 80
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 1800 363463
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 1800 363430
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
394
ITALY
LATVIA
LITHUANIA
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 0 42653
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
TC MOTORS LTD.
Silberauto AS
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 1692 16
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
SIA “Autobrava”
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 363430
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
41 Krasta Str.
Pirklių g. 9
LV-1003 Riga
LT-02300 Vilnius
Tel.: +37167812 313
Tel +370 52 665956, GSM +370 698 24950
Mob.: +371 29498662
Fax +370 52 665951
Fax: +371 67812313
service24h@silberauto.lt
G.Astras street 5,
LV-1084 Riga
Tel.: +371 67812312
Mob.: +371 29498662
Fax +371 671 462 56
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
395
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 8002 5888
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Chrysler New Zealand
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 8002 8216
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 8002 8217
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Private Bag 14907
Panmure New Zealand
Tel: 09573 7800
Fax: 09573 7808
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
396
NORWAY
PANAMA
PARAGUAY
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Automotora Autostar S. A.
Garden Autolider S.A
Avenida Domingo Diaz, Via Tocumen, Frente a
la Urbanizacion El Crisol
Av. República de Argentina esq. Facundo
Machain
Panamá, Panamá
Asuncion, Paraguay
Tel.: +507 233 7222
Tel.: +595 21 664 580
Fax: +507 233 2843
Fax: +595 21 664 579
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
397
PERU
POLAND
PORTUGAL
Divemotor S.A.
FCA Poland
Chrysler Portugal S.A.
Av. Canada 1160, Urb. Sta. Catalina
Ul. M.Grażyńskiego 141.
Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Dª Amélia
Lima, Peru
43-300 Bielsko-Biała
Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1ªA
Zip Code Lima 13
Tel: +48 (033) 813-21-00, 813-51-00
2770-229 Paço de Arcos
Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 533700
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
(Polish language - select code 23)
Portugal
Fax: (51-1) 712 2002
Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00
Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 3 634 3000
International Toll Number
Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
398
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
ISLANDS
REUNION
ROMANIA
COTRANS AUTOMOBILES
AUTO ITALIA IMPEX SRL
FCA Caribbean LLC
17 Bd du Chaudron, 97490 Sainte Clotilde
Bd. Timisoara nr. 60/D
P.O. Box 191857
Tel: 0262920000
Bucuresti, ROMANIA
San Juan 009191857
Fax: 0262488443
Tel: +40 (0)21.444.333.4
Tel.: 7877825757
Fax: +40 (0)21.444.2779
Fax: 7877823345
www.autoitalia.ro
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
399
RUSSIA
SERBIA
SLOVAKIA
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 88 001 00 8182
International Toll Number
Tel: +495 212 21 38
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 120120
International Toll Number
Tel: +381 34 356712
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 800 900 001
International Toll Number
Tel: +421 800 900 001
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 88 001 00 8182
International Toll Number
Tel: +495 212 21 38
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 363636
International Toll Number
Tel: +381 34 356713
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 802 900 001
International Toll Number
Tel: +421 800 900 001
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 88 001 00 8182
International Toll Number
Tel: +495 212 21 38
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 801 900 001
International Toll Number
Tel: +421 800 900 001
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
400
SLOVENIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
Avto Triglav d.o.o.
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 8066727869
International Toll Number
Tel: +27102525000
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 900 10 5337
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Dunajska 122
1000 Ljubljana
Tel: 01 5883 400
Fax: 01 5883 487
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 8066727869
International Toll Number
Tel: +27102525000
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 8066727869
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 900 1692 00
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 900 363430
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
401
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
TAIWAN
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 020 5337 00
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 0426 53
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Chrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD.
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 020 303035
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 1692 16
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 020 303036
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 3634 30
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza
1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3
Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.
Tel.: 080081581
Fax: 886225471871
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
402
TURKEY
UKRAINE
UNITED KINGDOM
Tofaş Türk Otomobil Fabrikasi A.S.
PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”
Büyükdere Cad, No:145 Tofaş Han Zincirlikuyu
Chervonoarmiyska Str. 15/2
ISTAMBUL
01004 Kyiv
Tel: (0212) 444 5337
Tel : +380 44 206 8888
Tel: (0212) 275 2960
+380 44 201 6060
Telefax: (0212) 275 0357
Fax: +380 44 206 8889
Jeep Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 0 426 5337
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 1692966
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12 045
Chrysler Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 1692 1692
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 1692169
International Toll Number
Tel: +39 02 444 12046
Dodge Customer Service*
Universal Toll Free Number
Tel: 00 800 36343 000
Local Toll Free Number
Tel: 0800 1692956
International Toll Number
Tel: Not Available
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
403
URUGUAY
VENEZUELA
SEVEL Uruguay S. A.
FCA Venezuela LLC
Convenio 820
Montevideo, Uruguay
Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona Industrial
Norte
Zip Code 11700
Valencia, Estado Caraboro
Tel: +598 220 02980
Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400
Fax: +598 2209-0116
Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538
Fax: (58) 241-6132602
(58) 241-6132438
PO BOX: 1960
Services And Parts
Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C Calle
Este-Oeste
C.C LD Center Local B-2
Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Telf: (58) 241-6132757
(58) 241-6132773
Fax: (58) 241-6132743
(*) The Customer Service offers information and assistance on products, services, dealerships and 24H Roadside Assistance. It can be contacted from the main European
countries by calling the Universal Toll Free Number. In case of problems, please use the Local Toll Free Number or the International Toll Number.
404
405
406
12
INDEX
407
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .301
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .133
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . .136
Enhanced Accident Response . . .139, 269
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . .269
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . .138
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . .136
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . .139
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . .134
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 133, 151
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Air Conditioner Maintenance. . . . . . . . .290
Air Conditioning Filter. . . . .57, 288, 289, 290
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . .290
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . .56, 290
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . .57
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
408
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .24, 86
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . .24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle. . . . . . . .6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .108
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .301, 324
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .24
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Auto Down Power Windows. . . . . . . . . .59
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . .59
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . .56
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .171, 304
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . .304
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . .71
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 285
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . .87
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . .19
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . .295
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .108
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 320
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . .170
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .167
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . .302
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . .151, 323
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .150
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Child Restraints
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .149
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . .160
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .381
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .302
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .301
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . .302
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . .300
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300, 302
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . .302
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .301, 324
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .183, 185
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101, 103
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .105
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .323
Bulk Storage Of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming. . . . . . .294
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . .302
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter . . . .293
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). .366
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . .71
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .108
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . .108
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . .113
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . .110
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .184
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .111
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . .88
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . .267
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .247
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 283
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 167
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .167
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Compartment . . . . . . . . .281, 282, 283
Compartment Identification . . . . .281, 282
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . .151, 323
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .321, 324
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 324
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 324
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . .286, 287
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . .286, 287
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 269
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .151, 323
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 299
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 153
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Air Conditioning . . . . .57, 288, 289, 290
409
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .287
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . .100, 153, 249
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . .160
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Fluids And Lubricants. . . . . . . . . .319, 325
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 90
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .120
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 182
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . .175
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . .247
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .267
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 323
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
410
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . .
Gauges
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . .321
.321, 323, 324
. . . . . . .324
. . . .221, 222
. . . . . . . .321
. . . . . . . .322
. . . . . . . .322
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.162
.172
.317
.226
.226
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .247
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Hill Descent Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . .114
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . .87, 97, 100
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning. . . . . . .316
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . .315
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . .48
Intervention Regeneration Strategy . . . . .295
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
iPod Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . .366
Jack Location . . . .
Jack Operation . . .
Jacking Instructions.
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .256
.257, 305
. . . .257
. . . .263
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .20, 24
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 24
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . .49
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 133, 151
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .43
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .113
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101, 103
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . .43
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . .87
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 90
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .247
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . .44
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . .114
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .91
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 102
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 70
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . .93
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .43, 100, 153, 249
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 100
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . .82
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . .82
Locks
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Lug Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .285
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . .273, 277
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .91
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . .33
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . .33
Methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Mini-Trip Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle. . . . . . . .6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . .122
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . .43
New Vehicle Break-In Period. . . . . .167, 168
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . .321
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . .287
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .86
Recommendation . . . . . . . . .286, 324
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 287, 324
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . .105
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .40
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .5
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
411
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . .196, 201
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . .329
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .252
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . .71
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 62
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . .39
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . .130
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .257
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Quadra-Lift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 178
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 176
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .302
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . .365
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . .48
412
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . .196, 201
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .20, 24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .365
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . .23
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . .22
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 24
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . .68
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Rotation, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . .151
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . .153
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . .273, 277
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . .131
Energy Management Feature . . . . . .131
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . .129
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . .129
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . .130
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Seat Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 151
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . .130
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .130
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . .126, 127, 129
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .129
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . .129
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 32, 35
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 32
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 86
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . .20, 24
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .169, 171
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . .100, 153, 249
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .312
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 310, 311
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 185
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . .188
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .183, 184, 185
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 159, 160
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .159, 161
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 167
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . .161, 167
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . .160
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Starting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . .159, 160
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . . . .160
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . .365
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 62
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 71
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .134
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . .22
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . .38, 39
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . .56
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 305, 310
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .308
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 305
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
General Information . . . . . . . .305, 310
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .122
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . .93
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 308
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . .257, 310, 311
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .308
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . .229
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 267
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . .235
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .113
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .233
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . .229
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . .229
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
413
Transmission . . . . .
Automatic . . . . .
Maintenance . . .
Shifting . . . . . .
Transporting Pets . . .
Tread Wear Indicators
Turn Signals . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .171
.171, 304
. . . .304
. . . .169
. . . .150
. . . .308
.100, 249
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect Voice Command. . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.339
.339
.380
.374
.321
.129
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . .320
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . .24
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .286, 287
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . .374
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
414
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . .247
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .47, 284
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Water Separator, Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . .293
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . . . . .311
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 61, 64
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Windows
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . .47, 284
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . .296
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . .296
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Wipers, Rain Sensitive. . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Grand Cherokee
17WK741-126-ENG-AA
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in Europe
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising